OWNER’S MANUAL
2018
FIAT
®
500 ABARTH
AND ABARTH CABRIO
Third Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group
Marketing S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC.
18FX-126-AC
FIAT
®
500 ABARTH
2018
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2018 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................3
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS ......................................................7
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ...................................................13
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . .........................................73
5
SAFETY .........................................................................99
6
STARTINGANDOPERATING.........................................................159
7
INCASEOFEMERGENCY ...........................................................195
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .....................................................229
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................283
10
MULTIMEDIA ....................................................................293
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ............................................................313
12
INDEX..........................................................................319
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured
that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styl-
ing, and high quality. This Owner’s Manual has been
prepared with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with the operation and mainte-
nance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty
Information, and customer oriented documents. In the
attached Warranty Booklet, you will find a description of
the services that FCA offers to its customers, the Warranty
Certificate and the details of the terms and conditions for
maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of
these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for
the first time. Following the instructions, recommenda-
tions, tips, and important warnings in this manual will
help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particu-
larly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and
transfer case shifting (if equipped). Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will
improve with experience.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle.
Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or
versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore,
you should only consider the information which is related
to the trim level, engine, and version that you have
purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Own-
er’s Information, that may or may not be applicable to your
vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”.
All data contained in this publication are intended to help
you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA aims at
a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this
reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model
described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For
further information, contact an authorized dealer.
NOTE: After reviewing the Owner’s Information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing, and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that an authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
4 INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustra-
tions may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose sym-
bols indicate precautions to be observed when using this
component. Refer to “Warning Lights and Messages” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information on the symbols used in your vehicle.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against oper-
ating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If
you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
1
INTRODUCTION 5
FRONT VIEW
Front View
1 — Exterior Mirrors 3 — Hood / Engine Compartment
2 — Windshield 4 — Headlights
8 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
REAR VIEW
Rear View
1 — Rear Lights
2 — Rear Windshield Wiper
3 — Liftgate
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 9
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Air Vents 4 — Uconnect System
2 — Uconnect Phone Controls 5 — Climate Controls
3 — Instrument Cluster
10 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTERIOR
Interior
1 — Steering Wheel 3 — Seats
2 — Glove Compartment 4 — Gear Selector
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 KEYS .................................16
▫ Key With Remote Control..................16
䡵 IGNITION SWITCH .......................19
▫ Mechanical Ignition Switch .................19
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder .................21
䡵 SENTRY KEY ...........................21
▫ Customer Key Programming ...............21
▫ Replacement Keys .......................22
▫ General Information .....................22
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM ...............22
▫ To Arm The System .....................22
▫ To Disarm The System ....................23
▫ Central Lock/Unlock (Switch Safe Lock Device) —
If Equipped............................24
䡵 DOORS ...............................24
▫ Manual Lock ...........................24
▫ Power Door Locks ......................26
䡵 SEATS ................................26
▫ Manual Adjustment Front Seats..............27
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ...............30
▫ Manual Folding Rear Seat..................30
䡵 HEAD RESTRAINTS ......................32
▫ Front Non-Adjustable Head Restraints ........32
▫ Rear Head Restraints .....................33
䡵 STEERING WHEEL .......................34
▫ Tilt Steering Column — If Equipped ..........34
䡵 MIRRORS ..............................34
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror ..................34
3
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped .....35
▫ Power Mirrors .........................36
▫ Folding Mirrors .........................36
▫ Spotter Mirror — If Equipped ...............37
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .............37
䡵 EXTERIOR LIGHTS .......................37
▫ Multifunction Lever ......................37
▫ Headlights ............................38
▫ Daytime Running Lights ..................38
▫ High Beams ...........................38
▫ Flash-To-Pass ..........................38
▫ Parking Lights .........................38
▫ Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay ...........39
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped .................39
▫ Turn Signals ...........................40
▫ Lane Change Assist ......................40
䡵 INTERIOR LIGHTS .......................40
▫ Interior Light Timing (Center Position) ........41
▫ Interior Light Timing (On/Right Position) ......41
▫ Cargo Area Lights .......................41
䡵 WIPERS AND WASHERS ...................41
▫ Front Windshield Wiper Operation ...........42
▫ Rear Windshield Wiper ...................43
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS .....................44
▫ Manual Climate Control Overview ...........45
▫ Automatic Temperature Control Overview ......49
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped .............................54
▫ Operating Tips .........................55
䡵 WINDOWS .............................57
▫ Power Window Controls ..................57
▫ Auto-Down............................58
▫ Wind Buffeting .........................58
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ..........58
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
▫ To Open ..............................59
▫ To Close ..............................59
▫ Wind Buffeting .........................59
▫ Sun Shade — If Equipped .................60
▫ Pinch Protect Feature .....................60
▫ Emergency Operation.....................60
䡵 POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP — IF EQUIPPED . . .61
▫ Lowering The Power Top ..................61
▫ Raising The Power Top ...................62
▫ Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure ......63
▫ Wind Stop.............................64
䡵 HOOD ................................64
▫ Opening .............................64
▫ Closing ...............................65
䡵 LIFTGATE .............................66
▫ Opening .............................66
䡵 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ...................67
▫ Storage ..............................67
▫ Cupholders ...........................67
▫ Sun Visors.............................68
▫ Electrical Power Outlets ..................69
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
KEYS
Key With Remote Control
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) key fob contains an
integrated key. To use the mechanical key, simply push the
mechanical key release button.
NOTE: The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle
has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your
authorized dealer.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door or twice, within five seconds, to
unlock all doors, and the liftgate. The turn signal lights will
flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated
entry system will also turn on.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Locking Doors With A Key
1. Insert the key with either side up.
2. Turn the key to the right to lock the door.
3. Turn the key to the left to unlock the door.
Opening Power Top Remote Function
The remote keyless power top function can only be used
with the engine off.
Integrated Key
1 — Mechanical Key Release
Button
3 — Lock Button
2 — Unlock Button 4 — Liftgate Button
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The remote keyless power top function can be used
to open the power top to the spoiler position.
Opening Power Top Remote Function:
OPEN — Push and hold the unlock button down on the
key fob for a minimum of three seconds to initiate Power
Top Open. The roof will stop opening whenever the unlock
button on the key fob is released, or when it reaches the
spoiler position.
WARNING!
Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you:
• Before operating the power top, make sure that no
moving parts of the convertible top can injure a
person or animal.
• Never place any extremities (hands, feet, etc.) near
the convertible top components, the upper wind-
shield area, the shelf area behind the rear seats, or
the convertible top stowage area while raising or
lowering the convertible top.
• When using the power top button on the key fob, if
potential danger exists while lowering the top, re-
lease the button immediately to interrupt the opera-
tion.
Key Fob Unlock/Power Top Open Button Location
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
Replacing The Battery In The Key With Remote
Control
To replace the battery, proceed as follows:
1. Push mechanical release button to open the mechanical
key.
2. Turn the screw to unlock using a small screwdriver.
3. Take out the battery case and replace the battery making
sure that polarities are correct.
4. Refit the battery case inside the key and lock it turning
the screw to lock.
NOTE: Used batteries should be properly disposed of as
specified by law, see an authorized dealer for assistance
needed.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an autho-
rized dealer.
NOTE: Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to another ve-
hicle.
Key Fob Components
1 — Mechanical Key
2 — Mechanical Key Release Button
3 — Battery
4 — Battery Case
5—Screw
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Request For Additional Remote Controls
The system can recognize up to eight remote controls.
Should a new remote control be necessary, go to an
authorized dealer, taking an ID document and the car
ownership documents.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
Mechanical Ignition Switch
The ignition switch can be turned to three different posi-
tions:
• STOP: engine off, key can be removed. Some electrical
devices (e.g. sound system, central door locking system,
etc.) can operate.
NOTE: The transmission must be shifted into PARK before
the key is turned to the STOP position. Then, the key can be
removed.
• AVV: engine start-up.
• MAR: driving position. All electrical devices are en-
abled.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
If the key is turned to the STOP position before shifting into
park, the key will have to be moved to the driving (MAR)
position and back to STOP. Then, the key can be removed.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK or the manual transmission
into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the parking
brake, then turn the engine OFF, remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. A child could oper-
ate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Ignition Switch
1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK) 3 — AVV (START)
2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the key from the ignition and lock all doors when
leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition
and the ignition switch position is in the OFF/LOCK
position, a signal sounds to remove the key.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the vehicle. The system
does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is
automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized ve-
hicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed
to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the ignition
switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
If the vehicle security light is on after the key is turned to
the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, it indicates that there
is a problem with the electronics.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been
programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Customer Key Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once a
Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle. When having the Sen-
try Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle
keys with you to an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors for
unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthor-
ized operation. While the vehicle security alarm is armed,
interior switches for door locks and liftgate release are
disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle
security alarm will provide the following audible and
visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park lamps and/or
turn signals will flash, and the vehicle security light on the
instrument panel will flash.
To Arm The System
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out of
the vehicle.
2. Lock the door using either the Central Lock/Unlock
switch or the Remote Keyless Entry key fob and close all
doors.
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. The horn will sound and the vehicle security light in the
instrument cluster will switch on for approximately
three seconds. This shows that the vehicle security
alarm is about to arm. During this period, if a door is
opened, the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN, or
the power door locks are unlocked in any manner, the
vehicle security alarm will automatically disarm. After
approximately three seconds, the vehicle security light
will flash. This shows that the vehicle security alarm is
fully armed.
The activation of the vehicle security alarm is followed by
a self-diagnosis stage. If a fault is detected during the
self-diagnosis stage, the horn will sound a second time.
If the horn sounds a second time, check that all doors, hood
and liftgate are closed correctly, then rearm the system.
If the vehicle security alarm sounds the horn a second time
even when all doors, hood and liftgate are correctly closed,
a fault has occurred in the operation of the system. Contact
an authorized dealer.
To Disarm The System
Push unlock on the key fob, or insert the key into the
ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON/
RUN position.
NOTE: The vehicle security alarm will not disarm when
the metal insert of the key is used on a single door lock
cylinder.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
vehicle security alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you remain
in the vehicle and lock the doors with the key fob, once the
vehicle security alarm is armed, when you pull the door
handle to exit, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, push the
unlock button on the key fob to disarm the vehicle security
alarm.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
Central Lock/Unlock (Switch Safe Lock Device) —
If Equipped
This safety device prevents the operation of the interior
door handles and the door locking/unlocking button.
It prevents the opening of the doors from inside the
passenger compartment, serving as an obstacle to break-in
attempts (e.g. broken window).
We recommend that you activate the Safe Lock device each
time you park your car.
Activating The Safe Lock Device
The Safe Lock device is enabled on all the doors by quickly
double-pushing the lock button on the key fob.
The direction indicators flash three times and the LED
above the button flashes to indicate that the Safe Lock
device has been activated. If one or more of the doors are
not closed correctly, the Safe Lock device will not activate,
preventing a person from getting stuck inside the passen-
ger compartment by entering the car through, and then
closing, the open door.
Deactivating The Safe Lock Device
The Safe Lock device deactivates automatically:
1. By pushing the unlock button on the key fob.
2. By turning the ignition key to the MAR position.
DOORS
Manual Lock
To lock each door from the inside, push the inside door
handle toward the door until the red lock indicator is
visible. To unlock the doors from the inside, pull the inside
door handle to the first detent or until the lock symbol is no
longer visible.
Safe Lock Device Location
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the lock symbol is visible when the door is shut, the door
will lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE: The manual lock knob unlocks each individual
door separately.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation. Always remove the
key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving
the vehicle unattended.
Manual Lock/Unlock Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is incorporated into the driver
door handle. Push or pull the handle to lock or unlock the
doors and liftgate. If the driver’s door handle is pushed, a
red lock indicator will show on the driver’s door handle
(indicating locked). When the door is closed, the door will
lock.
NOTE: To prevent the key from being locked in the vehicle,
the doors will automatically unlock if the driver’s door
handle is pushed when the key is in the ignition.
Auto Door Locks
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when
the vehicle’s speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
NOTE: Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor-
dance with local laws.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Door Lock Handle
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Adjustment Front Seats
Forward/Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near
the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the desired
position is reached. Then, using body pressure, move
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat
adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or
death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Adjusting Bar
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
Seat Height Adjustment
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using
a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pump the
lever upward to raise the seat height, or pump the lever
downward to lower the seat height.
Recline Adjustment
The recline adjustment lever is located on the inboard side
of the seat. To recline the seatback, lift up the recline lever,
lean back until the desired position has been reached, and
release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
Height Adjuster
Recline Lever
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
EZ Entry Feature
The driver and front passenger seats have an EZ entry
feature for rear seat passengers. Pull upward on the release
tether, located on the outboard side of the seatback, dump
the seatback forward, then slide the seat forward to allow
access in and out of the rear seat.
Lift the seatback upright and push the seat rearward to its
locked position once the rear passengers are seated.
Memory Seat Feature
Both front seats have a memory feature, which can operate
in two ways:
• Memory Function Option 1 (Full Seat Back And Track
Fore/Aft Position Memory) — After using the EZ entry
function, the seatback angle and the track fore/aft
adjuster can both re-lock into the position they were
most recently adjusted to. This is accomplished if the
seat is moved fully rearward to its last fore/aft position
on the tracks before the seat back is returned upright.
•
Memory Function Option 2 (Seat Back Only Memory) —
After using the EZ entry function, the seat back may first
be returned upright prior to going back to the last
fore/aft (memory) position on the tracks. This results in
the seat back memory being set only – The track will then
be locked forward of its last set fore/aft memory posi-
tion. To then reset the fore/aft track memory feature (to
reestablish Memory Function Option 1), the seat has to be
returned fully rearward to its last fore/aft memory track
position as described in Memory Function Option 1.
EZ Entry Pull Strap
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats may
be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are
located on the center instrument panel area.
Push the switch once to turn on the heated seats.
Push the switch a second time to shut the heating
elements off.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Manual Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks have a fold down feature to allow
increased cargo capacity.
Push down the release button, located at the outboard top
of the seatback and move the seatback to its folded-down
position to provide a flat load floor cargo area. When
returning the seatback to its upright position, push rear-
ward until the seatback is properly latched.
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
Rear Seat Release Buttons Folded Rear Seats
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Front Non-Adjustable Head Restraints
The non-adjustable head restraints are form fitted into the
upper structure of the seatback and are designed to reduce
the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event
of a rear impact. The seatback should be properly adjusted
to an upright position where the head restraint is posi-
tioned as close as possible to the back of your head.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Non-Adjustable Head Restraint
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Safety” for information on tether routing.
NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can
go then push the release button and the adjustment button
at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up.
To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts
into the holes and push downward. Then adjust the head
restraint to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt Steering Column — If Equipped
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. The tilt control lever is located on the
left-side of the steering column, below the turn signal
controls.
Push down on the lever to unlock the column. With one
hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering
column up or down as desired. Push the lever up to lock
the column firmly in place.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
The mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for
various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on
the view through the rear window.
Tilt Control Lever
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should
be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by
pushing the button at the base of the mirror. The on/off
symbol on the button will illuminate when the auto-
dimming feature is enabled.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is mov-
ing in REVERSE.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror Power Button
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s door
trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of a mirror select switch
and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a mirror,
push the mirror select switch to either the L (left) or R
(right) to select the mirror you need to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than
they really are. Relying too much on your passenger
side convex mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in
the passenger side convex mirror.
Folding Mirrors
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to pivot
forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The mirror has
three detent positions: full forward, normal and full rear-
ward.
Power Mirror Switches
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Spotter Mirror — If Equipped
Some models are equipped with a driver’s side spotter
mirror. The spotter mirror allows for a greater range of
visibility on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Climate
Controls” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever, located on the left side of the
steering wheel, controls the operation of the headlights,
headlight beam selection, passing light and turn signals.
NOTE: The headlights can only be turned on with the
ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Spotter Mirror
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Headlights
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever upward
to the first detent for headlight operation.
NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime
Running Lights will be deactivated.
Daytime Running Lights
To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate the
end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol.
NOTE: The low beams and side/taillights will not be on
with DRL.
If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was
purchased the DRL function can be turned on or off using
the display menus. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
timedia” for further information.
High Beams
With the low beams activated, push the multifunc-
tion lever towards the instrument panel to turn on
the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever toward the
steering wheel to turn off the high beams.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to turn
on until the lever is released.
Parking Lights
To turn on the parking lights, remove the key or
turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK position and
turn on the headlights.
Headlight Operation
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have
the headlights remain on for a preset period of time.
Activation
Remove the key or turn the ignition to the STOP (OFF/
LOCK) position, and pull the multifunction lever toward
the steering wheel within two minutes. Each time the lever
is pulled, the activation of the lights will be extended by 30
seconds. The activation of the lights can be extended to a
maximum of 210 seconds.
Deactivation
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel and
hold it for more than two seconds.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog light switch is located on the center stack of the
instrument panel, just below the radio.
Push the switch once to turn the front fog lights on. Push
the switch a second time to turn the front fog lights off.
Fog Light Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
Turn Signals
Push the multifunction lever upward to signal a right turn
or downward to signal a left turn. The corresponding
indicator in the instrument cluster display will blink to
indicate the operation of the turn signal.
NOTE: The indicators will automatically turn off when the
turn has been completed and the steering wheel is returned
to a straight position.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three
times. Then, the turn signal (right or left) will automatically
turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
The interior light switches are located in the overhead
console. The interior lights can be set to three different
positions (Off/Left Position, Center Position, On/Right
Position).
Using the switch on the left overhead, push the switch to
the right from its center position and the lights are always
on. Push the switch to the left from its center position and
the lights are always off. Leave the switch in the center
position, and the lights are turned on and off when the
doors are opened or closed. The switch on the right side of
the overhead console controls the map or reading function
of the lights. Push the switch to the right to turn on the
right light and push the switch to the left to turn on the left
light.
Turn Signal Operation
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the switch
is in the center position or that the lights are off to
avoid draining the battery.
Interior Light Timing (Center Position)
There are four different modes of operation that can be
activated in this position:
• When one door is opened, a three minute timer is
activated.
• When the key is removed from the ignition (within two
minutes of the ignition being turned OFF), a 10 second
timer is activated.
• When the doors are unlocked with the key fob, a 10
second timer is activated.
• When the doors are locked with the key fob, the lights
will turn off.
Interior Light Timing (On/Right Position)
When all doors are closed a 15-minute timer is activated.
NOTE: The timer is deactivated when the key is moved
into the ON/RUN position.
Cargo Area Lights
There is also a courtesy light located in the rear cargo area.
Whenever the rear lift gate is opened, the light will turn on
and then turn off when the lift gate is closed.
WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the right
side of the steering column.
NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only operate
with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Cargo Light Location
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
Front Windshield Wiper Operation
There are four different modes of operation for the front
windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can be
raised or lowered to access these modes:
Low Speed
Push the lever downward to the second detent. The wipers
will operate at low speed.
High Speed
Push the lever downward to the third detent. The wipers
will operate at high speed.
Windshield Wiper Off
This is the normal position of the wiper lever.
Intermittent Wiper Operation
Push the lever downward to the first detent. The wipers
will operate intermittently.
NOTE: The Intermittent function only has one detent, but
wiper delay will vary with changes in vehicle speed. As
vehicle speed increases, the delay time will decrease.
Front Windshield Washer Operation
Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the steer-
ing wheel to activate the washers. The wipers will activate
automatically for three cycles after the lever is released.
Windshield Wiper Operation
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the wind-
shield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in
any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Manual High Speed/Mist
Push the lever upward from the off position. The wipers
will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray
from a passing vehicle. This operation will continue until
the lever is released. When the lever is released, the wipers
will return to the off position and automatically shut off.
Rear Windshield Wiper
Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer lever
upward to the first detent past the intermittent settings for
intermittent wipe operation. With the front windshield
wiper active, rotate the end of the windshield wiper/
washer lever upward. The rear wiper will operate in the
same mode as the front windshield wipers, but at half the
frequency. When the transmission is shifted into REVERSE,
the rear wiper will automatically operate at low speed and
return to normal operation when the transmission is
shifted out of REVERSE.
Rear Wiper Operation
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only operate
with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Rear Windshield Washer Operation
Push the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the in-
strument panel to activate the rear washer. Push and hold
the lever for more than a half second and the wipers will
activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is
released.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen (if equipped) and on the instrument panel
below the radio.
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Climate Control Overview
Manual Climate Control
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illuminate when the
A/C system is engaged.
Recirculation Setting
Rotate this control to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Re-
circulation can be used when outside air conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humid-
ity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be
unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The
A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use
of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Ex-
tended use of this mode is not recommended.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the interior cabin. Rotating the
knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates cooler tempera-
tures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures.
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the
system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise
from the OFF position.
NOTE: Depending on the configuration, your vehicle may be equipped with four blower
speeds.
Modes Control: Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and
demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel lo-
cated below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel out-
lets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Icon Description
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Front Defrost
Mode
Front Defrost Mode
Turn the knob clockwise to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. Air comes from
the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower
level increases. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and
side window defrosting and defogging.
Rear Defrost
Button
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator illuminates when the rear window defroster
is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after a short period of time.
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Temperature Control Overview
Automatic Temperature Controls
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
Control Descriptions
Icon Description
A/C Button
Push and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Per-
forming this function again will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the
A/C indicator will turn off.
Recirculation Button
Push and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change
the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when
outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can
be used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fog-
ging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing
the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air
stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and
automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” in this section for more information.
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Front Defrost Button
Push and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illumi-
nates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maxi-
mum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. Per-
forming this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the front defrost mode
is turned off then the climate system returns the previous setting.
Rear Defrost
Button
Rear Defrost Button — If Equipped
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator illuminates when the rear window defroster
is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after a short period of time.
Blower Control Up And Down Buttons
Provides the occupants with blower control. Push the UP button to increase blower speed. Push
the DOWN button to decrease blower speed.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Icon Description
Modes Control: Push the button in the center of the knob to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow distri-
bution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist
outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel lo-
cated below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets. To access this mode, press both the Panel
and Floor Mode buttons.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel out-
lets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control Off Button
Push and release this button to turn the Climate Control on/off.
Temperature Up And Down Button
Provides the occupants with temperature control. Push the Up button for warmer temperature
settings. Push the Down button for cooler temperature settings.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning sys-
tem. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, push the A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of
the windows.
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if
needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located
in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of
the radiator and through the condenser.
Recirculation
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to
excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may
be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls, if equipped,
the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation is dis-
abled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to
use Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED in the
control button to blink and then turns off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system
to maintain by adjusting the temperature control but-
tons. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the
system achieves and automatically maintains that com-
fort level.
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You experience the
greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable fea-
ture.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan remains on low
until the engine warms up. The blower increases in speed
and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
NOTE: The system will not automatically sense the pres-
ence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost mode
must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side
glass.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended, because it may
cause window fogging.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e.,
vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the
blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor dam-
age when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select De-
frost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do
not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from
the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your A/C
air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
WINDOWS
Power Window Controls
The power window controls are located on the shifter
bezel, below the climate controls, which operate the driver
and passenger door windows. The window controls will
operate when the ignition switch is in the MAR (ACC/
ON/RUN) position.
Power Window Switches
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Auto-Down
The window switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push
the window switch for approximately one second, release,
and the window will go down automatically. To cancel the
Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in either the up
or down direction and release the switch. To open the
window part way, pull the window switch briefly, and
release the switch when the window is in the desired
position.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located in the overhead
console.
Power Sunroof Switch
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to
children. Occupants, particularly unattended chil-
dren, can become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury
may result.
To Open
Push and hold the power sunroof switch rearward for
approximately one second and the sunroof will stop at the
vented position. Push the switch a second time and hold
for approximately one second and release, the sunroof will
open fully, then stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement of
the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
To Close
With the sunroof in the full open position, pull the power
sunroof button and hold it for approximately one second,
the sunroof will return to the vented position. Pull the
switch a second time and hold for approximately one
second to completely close the sunroof.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Sun Shade — If Equipped
For vehicles equipped with either a power sunroof or a
fixed glass roof, there is a sun shade that can be open or
closed. To open the sun shade, push the tab and move the
shade to a full open position.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the
sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction
in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this oc-
curs. Next, push the switch forward and release to Express
Close.
Emergency Operation
In case of electrical failure, the sunroof can be operated
with the hex wrench that is located in the glove compart-
ment. There is a plug located in the rear of the sunroof
opening at the center of the vehicle. Removing the plug
reveals a hex opening in the motor assembly of the sunroof.
Insert the hex wrench and turn, moving the sunroof to the
desired location.
Manual Sun Shade
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP — IF EQUIPPED
On vehicles equipped with a power convertible top, the
power convertible top switch is located on the overhead
console. The switch contains two buttons. The passenger
side button is used to open the power top, and the driver
side button is used to close the power top.
NOTE:
• The power top buttons will operate when the ignition
switch is turned to the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position.
• The power top can be remotely operated with the key
fob. Refer to “Opening Power Top Remote Function” in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for more information.
• The soft top cannot be lowered in temperatures lower
than –22°F (-30°C) but it can be closed at temperatures as
low as –4° F (-20°C).
• The highest temperature that the convertible top is
operational is at 176°F (80°C).
Lowering The Power Top
Auto Open
Push the top open button approximately one second for the
three-quarter open/spoiler position. Push the top open
button for approximately one second a second time to fully
open the convertible top.
Manual Open
For manual open, push and hold the open button until
desired roof position or until spoiler position.
Power Convertible Top Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
NOTE:
• Vertical movement only operates in auto open/close
mode.
• If you are traveling at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h)
and wish to open the top, it will open to only three-
quarter of the way.
Raising The Power Top
Auto Close
From the convertible top fully open position, push the top
close button for approximately one second for the three-
quarter open/spoiler position. Push the top close button
for approximately one second a second time for the one-
quarter open position. Push and hold close button to fully
close convertible top.
Manual Close
For manual close, push and hold the close button until
desired position until one-quarter open position. Push and
hold again for full close position.
NOTE:
• If the top is three-quarter of the way open, you can close
the top if vehicle speeds are above 50 mph (80 km/h).
• If the top is fully open and the vehicle is traveling at
50 mph (80 km/h) or above, it will not allow you to close
the top.
NOTE: Rail lubrication is recommended every 2,000 cycles,
or if scratching noises due to dust are present. Refer to
“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
information.
WARNING!
The convertible top does not provide the structural
protection that a reinforced metal roof does and the
fabric top cannot be expected to prevent the ejection of
the occupants in a collision. Therefore, it is important
that all occupants wear their seat belts at all times.
Death or serious injuries could occur if you are ejected
from the vehicle during a collision.
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage
the top material. Also, increased water pressure may
force water past the weather strips.
• Remove any standing water from the top and dry the
surface before opening it. Operating the top, opening
a door or lowering a window while the top is wet
may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior.
• Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure
directed at the weather strip seals may cause water to
leak into the vehicle’s interior.
Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure
If your power convertible top does not operate in the Auto
Opening/Closing mode (automatically opening/closing to
the one-quarter open and three-quarter open comfort
stops), or if the remote keyless power top function is
inoperable, or if the trunk lid does not open - the following
relearn procedure may be necessary.
1. Confirm that the door/trunk lid are closed.
2. Begin with the top in the fully closed position (using
manual mode).
3. Hold the open button to move the top to the fully open
position.
4. Continue to hold the open button for an additional 30
seconds.
5. Release the open button.
6. Hold the closed button to move the top to the fully
closed position.
7. Continue to hold the closed button until the top begins
to cycle fully open, then release the closed button.
At the end of step 7 the top will automatically cycle to the
fully open position, and then close to the one-quarter open
position.
This will confirm that the relearn procedure was success-
ful.
Auto open/close will now be functional, as well as trunk
lid operation, and remote keyless power top function.
NOTE: DO NOT interrupt this activity.
If the power convertible top does not relearn, repeat the
procedure a second time.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Wind Stop
The Wind Stop installs in the backseat area of the vehicle.
The Wind Stop will not interfere with power top operation.
Therefore, it can remain installed when the top is up.
HOOD
Opening
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the bottom of the RED hood release lever, located
on the left kick panel, rearward.
2. Rotate the safety catch under the front edge of the hood,
near the center, and raise the hood.
Hood Release Lever
Hood Safety Latch Location
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Lift the hood prop rod that clips to the right side (left
side when standing in front of the hood) of the engine
compartment. Place the hood prop rod in the hole of
hood hinge to secure the hood in the open position.
In hot climates, the prop rod may be hot. Pick up the prop
rod at the foam on the end of the prop rod.
Closing
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
Hood Prop Rod
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
LIFTGATE
Opening
To unlock the liftgate, use the key fob or activate the power
door lock switches located on the driver door handle.
To open the liftgate, squeeze the liftgate release handle and
pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do
not use the recirculation mode.
NOTE: Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when opening
the liftgate in cold weather.
Liftgate Handle
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Storage
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release handle.
Cupholders
Front Cupholders
For the driver and front passenger, cupholders are located
on the floor console between the front seats.
Glove Compartment Latch
Front Cupholders
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Rear Cupholders
For rear passengers, there are cupholders located on the
floor between the front driver and passenger seats.
Sun Visors
The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the
headliner, near the front windshield. The sun visors can be
rotated downward or up against the door glass. Both sun
visors are equipped with courtesy mirrors. To view the
courtesy mirror, slide the mirror cover outward.
Rear Cupholders
Slide Courtesy Mirror Cover Outward (Passenger Side
Shown)
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Electrical Power Outlets
There is a standard 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet, located
in the floor console, for added convenience. This power
outlet can power mobile phones, electronics and other low
power devices.
Power is available when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN or START position. Insert the cigar lighter or
accessory plug into the outlet for use. To preserve the
heating element, do not hold the lighter in the heating
position.
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watts (13 Amps)
power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Im-
proper use of the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Center Stack Power Outlet
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Your vehicle is also equipped with a charge-only USB
power outlet that can be used to power cellular phones,
small electronics, and other low powered electrical acces-
sories. This USB charging outlet is located inside the glove
compartment.
NOTE: Close the glove compartment immediately after
use while driving. Injuries may occur during accidents if
the glove compartment is left open.
Glove Compartment Charge-Only USB Port
Power Outlet Fuse Location – Underhood
F15 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Front Console/Aux Power Outlet
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery
even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and
with great caution.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTERS ..................74
▫ Instrument Cluster Descriptions .............79
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ............80
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons ....81
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Setup Menu........82
▫ Oil Change Reset ........................83
▫ Turbo Boost Gauge ......................83
䡵 TRIP COMPUTER.........................84
▫ Trip Button ............................84
▫ Trip Functions .........................84
▫ Values Displayed ........................84
䡵 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ..........85
▫ Red Warning Lights ......................85
▫ Yellow Warning Lights ....................89
▫ Yellow Indicator Lights ...................94
▫ Green Indicator Lights ....................95
▫ White Indicator Lights ....................95
▫ Blue Indicator Lights .....................95
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ....96
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ..........................96
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ............................97
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTERS
Your vehicle is equipped with one of the following instru-
ment clusters.
Lounge Instrument Cluster Base
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Sport Instrument Cluster Base
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 75
Sport Instrument Cluster Sport Mode
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Sport Turbo Instrument Cluster Base
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 77
Sport Turbo Instrument Cluster Sport Mode
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
• This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000). Before the pointer reaches the red area,
ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage.
2. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The digital gauge will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, or up mountain
grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper
limits of the normal operating range.
WARNING!
• Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H,” turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Servicing And
Maintenance.” Follow the warnings under the Cool-
ing System Pressure Cap paragraph.
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The digital display shows the amount of fuel in the
tank.
• The switching on of the digital warning light indicates
that 1 – 1.3 gallons of fuel are left in the tank; in this
situation, refuel as soon as possible.
• Do not travel with the fuel tank almost empty; any
gaps in fuel delivery could damage the catalytic con-
verter.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 79
5. Base And Sport Mode Gauge Displays
Depending on what options and trim level your vehicle
may be equipped with, two gauge displays are available
with the push of the Sport Mode button.
• Instant Consumption Bar graph: This bar graph shows
the instant fuel consumption, the style changes accord-
ing to vehicle version while minimum and maximum
values change depending on selected unit. The pos-
sible labels are:
• Mpg
• Km/l
• l/100 km
• “Sport Mode” — Gas Pedal Percentage Gauge: This
gauge shows what percent the gas pedal is currently
depressed at.
• “Sport Mode” — The active instrument cluster display
screen will change to the G-Force screen.
• “Sport Turbo Mode” — This gauge shows the Turbo
boost during acceleration.
• “Turbo Pressure Gauge” — This gauge shows the level
of turbo pressure.
NOTE: Different trips may have different values even if the
same driving style is maintained. Some factors that may
impact the calculated index value are:
• Traffic conditions
• Trip duration
• Temperature (engine and ambient)
6. Instrument Cluster Display
• The instrument cluster display features a driver-
interactive display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Dis-
play” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important informa-
tion about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a
driver interactive display located on the instrument panel,
your instrument cluster display can show you how sys-
tems are working and give you warnings when they aren’t.
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll
through and enter the main menus and submenus. You can
access the specific information you want and make selec-
tions and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
The driver-interactive instrument cluster display is located
in the center of the instrument cluster.
The system display consists of the following:
• System Status
• Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
• Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)
• Outside Temperature Display
• Trip Computer Functions
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Push and release the MENU button briefly to access the
instrument cluster display. Push and hold the MENU
button (approximately one second) to return to the main
screen.
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll upward
through the displayed menu and the related options or to
increase the displayed value.
Push and release the down arrow button to scroll down-
ward through the displayed menu and the related options
or to decrease the value displayed.
NOTE: Up and down arrow buttons activate different
functions according to the following situations:
• To scroll the menu options upwards or downwards.
• To increase or decrease values during settings.
Instrument Cluster Display
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 81
NOTE: When opening one of the front doors, the instru-
ment cluster display will turn on the clock and the miles or
kilometers covered (if equipped) for a few seconds.
Instrument Cluster Display Setup Menu
The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a
cycle. Push and release the up and down arrow buttons to
access the different options and settings (setup).
The setup menu can be activated by pushing the MENU
button. A single push on the up or down arrow button will
scroll through the setup menu options. The menu includes
the following functions:
• Buzzer Volume
• Service — If Equipped
• Headlight Adjustment — If Equipped
• Trip B Data
• Audio Repetition — If Equipped
• Navigation Repetition — If Equipped
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without Sub-
menu
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to select the
main menu option to set.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button (by
single pushes) to select the new setting.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the
new setting and go back to the main menu option
previously selected.
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Submenu
1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to display
the first submenu option.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow button (by
single pushes) to scroll through all the submenu options.
3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to select the
displayed submenu option and to open the relevant
setup menu.
4. Push and release the up or down arrow button (by
single pushes) to select the new setting for this submenu
option.
5. Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the
new setting and go back to the previously selected
submenu option.
6. Push and hold the MENU button to return to the main
menu (short hold) or the main screen (longer hold).
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Change Reset
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indi-
cator system. The “Change Engine Oil” message will
appear in the instrument cluster display for approximately
5 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time the ignition is placed in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and
release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer
to the following procedure.
1. Place the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) posi-
tion. (Do not start the engine.)
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Turbo Boost Gauge
Your vehicle is equipped with a boost gauge and integrated
shift light indicator located to the left of the instrument
cluster. The boost gauge indicates the intake manifold
pressure relative to barometric pressure. The engine man-
agement system in your vehicle intelligently regulates
intake manifold pressure based on environmental (ambi-
ent) and engine operating conditions.
Turbo Boost Gauge
1 — Turbo Boost Gauge
2 — SPORT Indicator
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 83
TRIP COMPUTER
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster. It
displays trip information such as: trip information, range,
fuel consumption, average speed, and travel time.
Trip Button
The TRIP button, located on the right steering column
stalk, can be used to display and to reset the previously
described values.
• A short button push displays the different values.
• A long button push resets the system and starts a new
trip.
Trip Functions
Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of new trip).
“Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• Trip Distance A
• Average Fuel Economy A
• Average Speed A
• Travel Time A (Driving Time)
“Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to:
• Trip Distance B
• Average Fuel Economy B
• Average Speed B
• Travel Time B (Driving Time)
“Current Trip” can be used to display the figures relating
to:
• Range
• Instantaneous Fuel Consumption
NOTE: “Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip B
Data”). “Range” and “Instantaneous Fuel Consumption”
cannot be reset.
Values Displayed
Range
This indicates the distance which may be traveled with the
fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that driving condi-
tions will not change. The message “----” will appear on the
display in the following cases:
• Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km).
• The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine
running.
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The range depends on several factors: driving
style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain roads,
etc.), and conditions of use of the vehicle (load, tire
pressure, etc.). Trip planning must take into account the
above notes.
Distance Traveled
This value shows the distance covered since the last reset.
Average Fuel Economy
This value shows the approximate average fuel consump-
tion since the last reset.
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is con-
stantly updated. The message “----” will appear on the
display if the vehicle is parked with the engine running.
Average Speed
This value shows the vehicle’s average speed as a function
of the overall time elapsed since the last reset.
Travel Time
This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instru-
ment panel together with a dedicated message and/or
acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the infor-
mation contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you are
advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the
information in this chapter in the event of a failure indica-
tion. All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some tell-
tales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
— Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault with
the air bag, and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a
bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light
is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 85
— Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake functions, in-
cluding brake fluid level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that
there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-
voir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the battery is not
charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is run-
ning, there may be a malfunction with the charging system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
— Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when one or more door(s) are
not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving and a door is opened, there
will also be a single chime.
— Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there’s a fault with
the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system. Refer to “Power
Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a problem
with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the vehicle is running, the light
will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the
problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the
PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light
remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will
usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
NOTE: This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 87
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
— Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too high, this indicator will
illuminate and a single chime will sound.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to “If
Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
— Hood Open Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the hood is left
open and not fully closed.
— Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the liftgate is open/
ajar/not fully closed.
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low engine
oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as possible, and contact
an authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This
light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The
engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or passenger
seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and if the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the
light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Re-
minder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a
chime will sound.
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
— Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with a message in the
instrument cluster display and a buzzer) to indicate a
transmission fault. Contact an authorized dealer if the
message remains after restarting the engine.
Yellow Warning Lights
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not function-
ing and service is required as soon as possible. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have
the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Warning
Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, and when ESC is acti-
vated. It should turn off with the engine running. If the
“ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the
ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator
Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
position.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or MAR
(ACC/ON/RUN), the ESC system will be on, even if it
was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 89
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC
event.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off Warning
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is
off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
— External Light Failure Indicator Light — If
Equipped
The External Light Failure Indicator will come on when a
failure to one of the following lights is detected:
• Direction Indicators
• Backup Lights
• Parking Lights
• Daytime Running Lights
• License Plate Lights
The failure relating to these lights could be:
• One or more blown bulbs
• A blown protection fuse
• A break in the electrical connection
— Fuel Cutoff Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate after an accident has
occurred, and the system has shut the fuel off.
— Fuel Cutoff Failure Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate if there is a fuel cutoff failure. If
this light illuminates, take it to an authorized dealer and
have them inspect it.
— Generic Warning Light
The Generic Warning Light will illuminate if any of the
following conditions occur: Oil Change Request, Engine
Oil Pressure Sensor Failure, External Light Failure, Fuel
Cut-Off Not Available, Parking Sensor Failure, DST System
Failure.
— Hill Holder Failure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the Hill Holder
System is not functioning properly and service is required.
Contact an authorized dealer.
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 1–1.3 gal (3–5 L)
this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added.
— Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a
part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control sys-
tems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the ignition switch from
OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor
quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start.
The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through
several typical driving styles. In most situations, the ve-
hicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
— ParkSense Failure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the ParkSense
System is not functioning properly and service is required.
Contact an authorized dealer.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 91
— Service Warning Light — If Equipped
The “Maintenance Plan” includes vehicle maintenance at
fixed intervals. For further information, refer to ⬙Scheduled
Servicing” in “Servicing And Maintenance”. This message
is displayed automatically along with the warning light
when the key is turned to MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) - 1,242
miles (2,000 km) before these deadlines and reappears
every 124 miles (200 km). Below 124 miles (200 km)
servicing indications are more frequent. The indication will
appear in miles or kilometers according to the ⬙Unit Of
Measurement⬙ settings. When the next scheduled service is
approaching and the key is turned to MAR (ACC/ON/
RUN), the word “Service” will appear on the display,
followed by the number of miles or kilometers left. Contact
a dedicated authorized dealership. The operations in the
“Maintenance Plan” will be performed and the message
will be reset.
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed
to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recom-
mended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring.
In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption
may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
above, the display will show the indications corresponding
to each tire.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
tain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to your au-
thorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 93
— Immobilizer Vehicle Theft Alarm Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate when the vehicle secu-
rity alarm system has detected an attempt to break into the
vehicle.
— Fuel Level Sensor Failure
This light illuminates when there is a fuel level sensor
failure. If this light illuminates, take it to an authorized
dealer and have them inspect it.
Yellow Indicator Lights
— Icy Road Condition Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will illuminate during an icy road condition.
— Stop Light Failure Indicator Light
This light will illuminate if one or more of the stop light
bulb fails.
The failure relating to this light could be:
• One or more blown bulbs.
• A blown protection fuse.
• A break in the electrical connection.
— Rear Defrost Light
This indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 20 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
— Oil Change Required Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that an oil
change is required. To reset the oil change indicator system,
refer to “Oil Change Reset” in “Instrument Cluster Dis-
play.”
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Green Indicator Lights
— Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the cruise control
is set to the desired speed. Refer to “Speed Control” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
— Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the park lights or
headlights are turned on.
— Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn
signal indicator will flash independently and the corre-
sponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals
can be activated when the multifunction lever is moved
down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
White Indicator Lights
— Cruise Control ON Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the electronic
speed control is ON, but a speed has not been set.
Blue Indicator Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high
beam headlights are on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of
the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunc-
tion lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn
off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙
scenario.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 95
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission
control systems. When these systems are operating prop-
erly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and
fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see
an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to ac-
cess this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
(Continued)
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in the
“Multimedia” section.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Main-
tenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is
not on when the engine is running, and that the
OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready
for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the follow-
ing:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about ten seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the igni-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SAFETY
CONTENTS
䡵 SAFETY FEATURES ......................100
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . .100
▫ Electronic Brake Control System ............101
䡵 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS .............107
▫ Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ......107
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........114
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features .........114
▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............114
▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................116
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ........124
▫ Child Restraints .......................139
▫ Transporting Pets ......................154
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ...........................155
▫ Transporting Passengers ..................155
▫ Exhaust Gas ..........................155
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ..............................156
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle ...........................158
5
SAFETY FEATURES
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in
maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking condi-
tions. The system operates with a separate computer to
modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up
and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When the
light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The system
reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning the igni-
tion OFF and ON again may reset the ABS if the fault
detected was only momentary.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio trans-
mitting equipment. This interference can cause pos-
sible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase brak-
ing or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
100 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
When you are in a severe braking condition involving the
use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as the
vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the system
reverting to the base brake system.
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a pulsing
sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise. These
occurrences are normal and indicate that the system is
functioning properly.
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic brake
control system that includes the Brake Assist System (BAS),
Traction Control System (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and
Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All systems work to-
gether to enhance vehicle stability and control in various
driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The sys-
tem detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock
brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
5
SAFETY 101
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa-
bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount of
wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s)
and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced accel-
eration and stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake
Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited
slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than
the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to
the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active
even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode or Full Off
mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this
section for further information.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes his foot off the brake
pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this
short period of time, the system will release brake pressure
and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The system will
release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of
throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the
intended direction of travel.
102 SAFETY
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 2.5% (manual transmission) or 7%
grade or greater (automatic transmission) hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle in NEUTRAL (manual transmission), vehicle
facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is
in REVERSE gear).
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system will
not activate and slight rolling may occur. This could
cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always
remember the driver is responsible for braking the
vehicle.
Disabling/Enabling HSA
If you wish to turn the HSA system on or off, it can be done
using the Customer Programmable Features in the
Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system enhances
directional control and stability of the vehicle under vari-
ous driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or
understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer-
ing or understeering condition. Engine power may also be
reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC
uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path
intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of
the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate
wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
5
SAFETY 103
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
NOTE: The ESC Off switch is located left of the steering
column (Manual Transmission Only).
WARNING!
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
(Continued)
ESC Off Switch (Automatic Transmission)
ESC Off Switch (Manual Transmission)
104 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappro-
priate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has three available operating modes.
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever the
vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in On mode. This
mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC
should only be turned to Partial Off for specific reasons as
noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC Off
switch. This mode is intended for times when a more
spirited driving experience is desired. It is also intended for
driving in deep snow, sand or gravel conditions, when
more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is
required to gain traction.
To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the switch again.
This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation.
5
SAFETY 105
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section) has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by
the ESC system is reduced.
Full Off
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only
and should not be used on public roadways. In this mode,
all TCS and ESC stability features are turned OFF, except
for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section. To
enter the “Full Off” mode, depress and hold the ESC OFF
switch for five seconds. After five seconds, the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF” mes-
sage will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC ON
again, momentarily press the ESC OFF switch.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque reduc-
tion and stability features are cancelled. Therefore, the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavail-
able. The “Full Off” ESC mode is intended for off-
highway or offroad use only.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
in the instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the MAR (ACC/ON/
RUN) position for four seconds. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continu-
ously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
106 SAFETY
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located
in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires
lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when
TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
NOTE:
• The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be ON even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially off.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will de-
crease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Servicing And
Maintenace” for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven, this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects, or natural
pressure loss through the tire.
5
SAFETY 107
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold tire pressure on the placard. Once the low tire pressure
warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light)
illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light to turn off. The
system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
tion.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 30 psi
(207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature
drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 23 psi (159 kPa). This tire pressure is suffi-
ciently low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the
tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light will turn off only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor.
108 SAFETY
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-
inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the
tire.
TPM System With Comfort Cluster
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the
instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels.
Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem,
transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
• Text Message Display
5
SAFETY 109
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, an audible chime will
be activated, and the “Low inflation pressure left or right
front/rear tire” text message will display when one or
more of the four active road tire pressures are low. Should
this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate
each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-
sure value. The system will automatically update and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the
updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when
a system fault is detected, an audible chime will be
activated and the “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem” text message will display. If the ignition key is cycled,
this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still
exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A
system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
• Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact
spare wheel and tire assembly.
• The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
• If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light and the Low inflation pressure left or right front /
rear tire message will still turn ON due to the low tire.
110 SAFETY
• However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid and the “Service Tire
Pressure Monitoring System” message will be dis-
played.
• This occurs for each subsequent ignition key cycle, a
chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid and the “Service Tire
Pressure Monitoring System” message will be dis-
played.
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will turn
OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-
pressure warning limit in any of the four active road
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information.
TPM System With (TFT) Tire Pressure Display
Screen
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the instrument cluster
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
5
SAFETY 111
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a
chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more
of the four active road tires. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a low pressure text message and a
graphic showing the low tire pressure tire highlighted in a
different color.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and
inflate the tires with low pressure to the vehicle’s recom-
mended cold placard pressure value. Once the system
receives the updated tire pressures, the system will auto-
matically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System Warning Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
sound a chime and also display a “Service Tire Pressure
Monitoring System” message in the instrument cluster for
approximately 5 seconds.
Low Tire Indicator
112 SAFETY
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will no longer flash, and the “Service Tire Pressure
Monitoring System” message will no longer display.
A system fault can occur due to any of the following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains ma-
terials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE:
• The TPMS will not monitor the pressure in a replace-
ment tire installed without a tire pressure sensor.
• If you install a replacement tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will remain
on and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in
the instrument cluster will still display a low pressure
message and a tire highlighted in a different color.
• After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster
will display a “Service TPM System” message.
Service TPM System Message
5
SAFETY 113
• For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the instrument cluster will display
a “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System” message.
Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it, the TPMS will update automatically. In addi-
tion, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will turn off as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20
minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS
210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the follow-
ing conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
114 SAFETY
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
for further information) should be secured in the rear
seat of a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do
not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoul-
der belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu-
pants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “Cus-
tomer Assistance” section for customer service contact
information.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat
of a vehicle with a rear seat.
5
SAFETY 115
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passen-
ger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuck-
led (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
116 SAFETY
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buck-
led again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 117
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one an-
other in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
118 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
5
SAFETY 119
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
120 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only
if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat
Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it
must be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if,
when worn, the distance between the front edge of
the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the
occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
5
SAFETY 121
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including preg-
nant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt
in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the
seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with an Energy
Management feature that may help further reduce the risk
of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has
a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in
a controlled manner.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
122 SAFETY
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati-
cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat
of a vehicle with a rear seat.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
5
SAFETY 123
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock-
ing mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could in-
crease the risk of injury in collisions.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring asso-
ciated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
124 SAFETY
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch
is in the AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the STOP/
OFF/LOCK position the air bag system is not on
and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is in the MAR/
ACC/ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunc-
tion in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
5
SAFETY 125
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag
covers.
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
(Continued)
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag/Driver Knee Impact Bolster
126 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat
of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 127
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protec-
tion by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passen-
ger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of
the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air
bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping
to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
128 SAFETY
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are
marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on
the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
5
SAFETY 129
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
130 SAFETY
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
WARNING!
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows
where the SABIC and its deployment path are lo-
cated should remain free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter-
mines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a
particular impact event is appropriate, based on the sever-
ity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the
ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact
events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that
require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts,
the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
5
SAFETY 131
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side win-
dows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly re-
strained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
132 SAFETY
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The
rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In
the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover
event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate,
the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE: The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
5
SAFETY 133
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing,
follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assem-
blies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
• Cut off battery power to the electric motor (If Equipped)
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem.
• Unlock the power door locks.
134 SAFETY
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
Response System:
• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
• Cut off battery power to the:
• Engine
• Electric Motor (if equipped)
• Electric power steering
• Brake booster
• Electric park brake
• Automatic transmission gear selector
• Horn
• Front wiper
• Headlamp washer pump
NOTE: After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition
to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine compart-
ment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the
vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident,
reset the system by following the procedure described
below. If you have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
After the event occurs, when the system is active, a
message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the igni-
tion switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR/ACC/
ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check
the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank
before resetting the system and starting the engine.
5
SAFETY 135
Depending on the nature of the event the left and right turn
signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may both be
blinking and will continue to blink. In order to move your
vehicle to the side of the road, you must follow the system
reset procedure.
Customer Action
Customer Will See
NOTE: Each step MUST
BE held for at least two
seconds
1. Turn ignition STOP/
OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal
Switch Must be placed in
Neutral State).
2. Turn ignition MAR/
ACC/ON/RUN.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
3. Turn right turn signal
switch ON.
Right turn light is ON
SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
4. Place turn signal in
neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
5. Turn left turn signal
switch ON.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is ON
SOLID.
Customer Action
Customer Will See
NOTE: Each step MUST
BE held for at least two
seconds
6. Place turn signal in
neutral state.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
7. Turn right turn signal
switch ON.
Right turn light is ON
SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
8. Place turn signal in
neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
9. Turn left turn signal
switch ON.
Right turn light is ON
SOLID.
Left turn light is ON
SOLID.
10. Turn left turn signal
switch OFF. (Turn Signal
Switch Must be placed in
Neutral State).
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light is OFF.
11. Turn ignition STOP/
OFF/LOCK.
136 SAFETY
Customer Action
Customer Will See
NOTE: Each step MUST
BE held for at least two
seconds
12. Turn ignition MAR/
ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire
sequence needs to be
completed within one
minute or sequence will
need to be repeated).
System is now reset and
the engine may be started.
Turn hazard flashers OFF
(Manually).
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60
seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset
procedure must be performed again in order to be success-
ful.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, in-
cluding adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger
side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 137
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact an au-
thorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accel-
erator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investi-
gation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
138 SAFETY
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Stan-
dards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call: 1–888–
327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: http://
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-
childsafety-index-53.htm
5
SAFETY 139
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Recommended Type Of Child
Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convert-
ible Child Restraint, facing rearward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years
old or who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
a five-point Harness, facing forward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have outgrown their
forward-facing child restraint, but
are too small to properly fit the
vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for
Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have outgrown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
140 SAFETY
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-
facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat
of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and con-
vertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
5
SAFETY 141
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-
facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward be-
cause it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the ve-
hicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages,
or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder be-
tween their neck and arm?
142 SAFETY
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Up to 65 lbs X X
5
SAFETY 143
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Child Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child
seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back
of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These
anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating posi-
tions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be
used with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Label
144 SAFETY
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the LATCH an-
chorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the com-
bined weight of the child and the child restraint is
65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether an-
chor instead of the LATCH anchorage system
once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
5
SAFETY 145
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be
used together to attach a rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH an-
chorages if allowed by the booster seat manufac-
turer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for
more information.
Can two child restraints be attached using a com-
mon lower LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position does
not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use
the seat belt to install a child seat in the center
position next to a child seat using the LATCH an-
chorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back
of the front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact. See your child restraint own-
er’s manual for more information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes Head restraints are removable in all seating
positions.
146 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the
rear of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean into
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating
position located on the back of the seat.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-
facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
LATCH Lower Anchorages
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
5
SAFETY 147
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
WARNING!
This vehicle does not have a center seating position.
Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to
install a child seat in the center of the back seat.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchor-
ages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating
position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
148 SAFETY
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child re-
straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
5
SAFETY 149
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description in
“Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)” under
“Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional information
on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
150 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a for-
ward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the
child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is al-
lowed, if the child restraint manufac-
turer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes Yes, all may be removed.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an
ALR retractor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
5
SAFETY 151
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
152 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and
pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the
head restraint.
5
SAFETY 153
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly be-
hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
154 SAFETY
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can even-
tually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
5
SAFETY 155
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the ex-
haust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air
Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until the
fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See an autho-
rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
156 SAFETY
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only
use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of
the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat
that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the accelera-
tor, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your
vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor mat using the
floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat
upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasten-
ers on a regular basis.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other
floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor
mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 157
WARNING! (Continued)
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelera-
tor, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are
suspected. The cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
158 SAFETY
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES .................161
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped ........161
▫ Automatic Transmission ..................161
▫ Normal Starting ........................161
▫ Cold Weather Operation .................161
▫ Extended Park Starting ...................162
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ..................162
▫ After Starting..........................163
▫ Turbocharger “Cool Down”................163
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .163
䡵 PARKING BRAKE .......................164
䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . . .165
▫ Five-Speed Manual Transmission ............165
▫ Recommended Shift Speeds ...............166
▫ Downshifting .........................167
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED .167
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock ................168
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .168
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission...........168
▫ Gear Ranges ..........................169
䡵 AUTOSTICK ...........................174
▫ Operation ............................174
䡵 SPORT MODE ..........................175
䡵 POWER STEERING ......................176
䡵 SPEED CONTROL .......................177
▫ To Activate ...........................178
▫ To Set A Desired Speed...................178
▫ To
Vary The Speed Setting ................178
6
▫ To Accelerate For Passing .................179
▫ To Resume Speed .......................180
▫ To Deactivate .........................180
䡵 REAR PARK ASSIST ......................180
▫ Rear Park Assist Sensors ..................180
▫ Rear Park Assist Warning Display ...........180
▫ Rear Park Assist Display..................181
▫ Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts .............181
▫ Failure Indications ......................183
▫ Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System ........183
▫ Park Assist System Usage Precautions ........183
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ........185
䡵 ADDING FUEL .........................187
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................187
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .............188
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING .....................188
▫ Certification Label ......................188
䡵 TRAILER TOWING ......................190
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ....................190
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . .190
䡵 DRIVING TIPS ..........................191
▫ Driving On Slippery Surfaces ..............191
▫ Driving Through Water ..................192
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector in NEU-
TRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the
vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking
ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is
pressed to the floor.
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Depress the brake
pedal before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting out
of PARK.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
Turn the ignition switch to the AVV (START) position and
release it when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start
within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the STOP
(OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Cold Weather Operation
To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low
temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking
when the ambient temperature is less than –22° F (–30° C)
and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine
block heater has not been used. An externally-powered
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
electric engine block heater is available as optional equip-
ment from your authorized dealer or may be standard
equipment in some markets.
The message “plug in engine heater” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is
below 5° F (–15° C) at the time the engine is shut off as a
reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold
start.
CAUTION!
Use of the recommended SAE 5W-40 synthetic engine
oil and adhering to the prescribed oil change intervals
is important to prevent engine damage and ensure
satisfactory starting in cold conditions.
Extended Park Starting
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
2. Cycle the ignition to the START mode and release it
when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 to 15 seconds, cycle
the ignition to the OFF mode, wait five seconds to allow
the starter to cool, then repeat the Extended Park
Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow the
starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat the
procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank continu-
ously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the
vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing serious
personal injury.
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
Turbocharger “Cool Down”
This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool the
turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending on the
type of driving and the amount of cargo, the pump will run
for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been shut off to
circulate coolant through the turbocharger. Although the
pump is rubber-mounted for quiet operation, it is normal
to hear it running during this time.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Dealer
Service” in “Servicing And Maintenance”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the manual
transmission in REVERSE or first gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console. To
apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, the Brake Warning
Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the
vehicle.
Parking Brake
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in
a location accessible to children. A child could oper-
ate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave a manual transmis-
sion in FIRST gear or REVERSE gear. Failure to do so
may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or
injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the park-
ing brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an au-
thorized dealer immediately.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Five-Speed Manual Transmission
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle
unattended without having the parking brake fully
applied. The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an
incline.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal.
Use each gear in numerical order; do not skip a gear. Be
sure the transmission is in first gear, not third, when
starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch can
result from starting in third gear.
For most city driving, you will find it easier to use only the
lower gears. For steady highway driving with light accel-
erations, fifth gear is recommended.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, and
never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal
partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the
clutch.
Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
NOTE: During cold weather, until the transmission lubri-
cant is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift
efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the transmission.
Recommended Shift Speeds
To use your manual transmission for optimal fuel economy,
it should be upshifted as listed in the following table.
Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds
Units In mph (km/h)
Engine
Size
Accel-
eration
Rate
1to2 2to3 3to4 4to5
1.4L
Turbo
Accel 14
(23)
23
(37)
29
(47)
38
(61)
Cruise 12
(19)
18
(29)
25
(40)
32
(52)
Gear Selector
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
Downshifting
Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and pro-
long engine life.
CAUTION!
If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift at
too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may cause
the engine to over speed if too low of a gear is selected
and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to the clutch
and the transmission can result from skipping a gear
while downshifting or down shifting at too high of a
vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal is held pressed
(i.e., not released).
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift down
to second or first when descending a steep grade.
When turning a corner, or driving up a steep grade,
downshift early so that the engine will not be overbur-
dened.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF,
and remove the ignition key. Once the key is re-
moved, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-
tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position. The key can only be removed from the ignition
when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, and once
removed, the transmission is locked in PARK.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be in the
ON/RUN mode (engine running or not), and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must press the brake pedal to move the gear selector
out of PARK (Refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System” in this section). To drive, move the gear selector
from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are self-
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/–) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift
control. Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward
(+) while in the AutoStick position (beside the DRIVE
position) will manually select the transmission gear, and
will display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 1,
2, 3, etc. Refer to ⬙AutoStick⬙ in this section for further
information.
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward)
it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear
(1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move
the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position)
for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
Gear Selector
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the engine OFF.
• Remove the ignition key.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exit-
ing the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF,
and remove the ignition key. Once the key is re-
moved, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the ignition
key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the gear selector
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head winds), use the
AutoStick shift control (refer to AutoStick in this section for
further information) to select a lower gear. Under these
conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating
limits, the transmission controller will expand the range of
torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to pre-
vent transmission damage due to overheating.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine coolant temperature. Nor-
mal operation will resume once the engine temperature has
risen to a suitable level.
Instrument Cluster Messages
Dedicated messages will be displayed in the instrument
cluster to alert the driver when certain unusual conditions
occur.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for ab-
normal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in a fixed gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damaging the trans-
mission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your transmission. If
the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service
is required.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
AUTOSTICK
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature pro-
viding manual shift control, giving you more control of the
vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and im-
prove overall vehicle performance. This system can also
provide you with more control during passing, city driv-
ing, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, and many
other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position (beside
the Drive position), it can be moved forward and rearward.
This allows the driver to manually select the transmission
gear being used. Moving the gear selector forward (-)
triggers a downshift, and rearward (+) an upshift. The
current gear is displayed in the instrument cluster.
NOTE: In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only shift
up or down when the driver moves the gear selector
rearward (+) or forward (-), except as described below.
• The transmission will automatically upshift when nec-
essary to prevent engine over-speed.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out (from a stop) in first, second, or third
gear. Starting out in second or third gear can be helpful
in snow or icy conditions. To select second or third gear
after the vehicle is brought to a stop, tap the gear selector
rearward (+) once or twice.
• The system will ignore shift commands that would
cause engine lugging or overspeed. An audible beep will
sound if an inappropriate gear is requested.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged
because the transmission will not shift automatically.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault
or overheat condition is detected.
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to
the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick
position at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
SPORT MODE
In Sport mode, the engine is more responsive to the
accelerator pedal, and provides more power by increasing
turbo boost.
This mode increases steering feedback to the driver with
slight increases in effort and throttle pedal-to-engine re-
sponse. Changes to the transmission shift schedules for
more aggressive shifting will occur on automatic transmis-
sion versions.
Sport mode driving is useful while driving on winding
roads where more steering precision is desired.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
1. Push the SPORT button, located above the climate
controls to activate SPORT mode.
NOTE: Once activated, a SPORT message will be dis-
played in the instrument cluster.
2. Momentarily release the accelerator pedal.
3. Press the accelerator pedal again to activate.
4. Push the SPORT button again to return to the standard
driving mode.
SPORT Button
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
1. Push the SPORT button, located above the climate
controls to activate SPORT mode.
NOTE:
• Once SPORT mode is activated, a “SPORT” message
will be displayed in the boost gauge.
• For maximum aerodynamics and handling, your ve-
hicle has a lowered ride height. Use caution when
entering steep driveways and parking spaces to pre-
vent damage.
2. Push the SPORT button again to return to the standard
driving mode.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in
tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light
efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the
electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it
from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer
the vehicle manually.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced or no power steer-
ing assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
If the Steering icon is flashing, it indicates that the vehicle
needs to be taken to an authorized dealer for service. It is
likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE POWER
STEERING” message is displayed on the instrument clus-
ter screen, they indicate that extreme steering maneuvers
may have occurred which caused an over temperature
condition in the power steering system. Once driving
conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a
few moments until the icon and message turn off. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the Steering icon, and the ⬙SERVICE POWER STEERING
- ASSIST OFF⬙ messages are displayed on the instrument
cluster screen, the vehicle needs to be taken to an autho-
rized dealer for service. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at low speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see an authorized dealer for
service.
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple
Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control system can be reactivated by
pushing the Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF 3 — SET (-)/Decel
2 — RES (+)/Resume/Accel 4 — CANC/Cancel
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster display will illuminate. To turn the
system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The
Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached
the desired speed, push the SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the RES (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed
unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
25 mph (40 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button,
or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set speed
from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition switch
OFF erases the set speed from memory.
REAR PARK ASSIST
The Rear Park Assist system provides audible and visual
indications of the distance between the rear fascia/bumper
and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a
parking maneuver. Refer to the “Park Assist System Usage
Precautions” for the limitations of this system and recom-
mendations.
The Rear Park Assist is automatically activated when the
transmission is placed into REVERSE.
Rear Park Assist Sensors
The four Rear Park Assist sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles, in the horizontal direction, from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 55 inches (140 cm) from the center
of the rear fascia/bumper and up to 24 inches (60 cm) from
the corners of the rear fascia/bumper, depending on the
location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
If several obstacles are detected, the Rear Park Assist
system indicates the nearest obstacle.
The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corresponds
to the maximum height of an obstacle that would clear the
underside of the vehicle during the parking maneuver.
Rear Park Assist Warning Display
The Rear Park Assist Warning screen is located within the
Uconnect Settings. It provides audible and visual warnings
to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper
and the detected obstacle. Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings⬙ in
“Multimedia⬙ for further information.
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
Rear Park Assist Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display will
turn ON indicating the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
arcs in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s distance
and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show solid arcs in the center rear region and
will produce an audible alert. As the vehicle moves closer
to the obstacle, the display will show fewer arcs and the
audible alert becomes more frequent.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show solid arcs in the left and/or
right rear region and will produce an audible alert. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show
fewer arcs and the audible alert becomes more frequent.
Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts
If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when the transmission
is placed into REVERSE, an audible alert is activated.
The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver
that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses
between the tones are directly proportional to the distance
from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succession
indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A continuous
tone indicates that the obstacle is less than 12 inches
(30 cm) away.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 181
Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System
SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION
Obstacle Distance An obstacle is present within the
sensors’ field of view
Audible Signal (dashboard loud-
speaker)
• Sound pulses emitted at a rate that
increases as the distance decreases.
• Emits continuous tone at 12 inches
(30 cm).
• Adjustable volume level. (Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.)
Visual Signal (Instrument Cluster
Display)
• Arcs are shown based on the obsta-
cle’s distance and location relative to
the vehicle. (Refer to “Rear Park As-
sist Display” for further information).
Failure Sensor or System failures Visual Signal (Instrument Panel)
• Icon appears on display.
• Message appears on the instrument
cluster display (if equipped).
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is not
muted.
The audible signal is turned off immediately if the distance
increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the distance
measured by the inner sensors is constant. If this condition
occurs for the external sensors, the signal is turned off after
three seconds (stopping warnings during maneuvers par-
allel to walls).
Failure Indications
A malfunction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or system is
indicated, during REVERSE gear engagement, by the in-
strument panel warning icon and message appearing on
the instrument cluster display.
The warning icon is illuminated and a message
appears on the instrument cluster display. Refer
to ⬙Instrument Cluster Display⬙ in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are indicated
immediately if they occur when the system is on.
Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor
is in failure condition, the instrument cluster display shall
indicate that the Rear Park Assist system is unavailable,
without reference to the sensor in failure condition. If even
a single sensor fails, the entire system must be disabled.
The system is turned off automatically.
Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In
washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapor
jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches (10 cm)
from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
Park Assist System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the
rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or
other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist system
operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of Rear Park Assist.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
• Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The Rear Park Assist system might not detect
an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could pro-
vide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
fascia/bumper.
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be placed
within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper
while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in
the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing a failure indication to be displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
(Continued)
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the
rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to
“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen.
After five seconds, this note will disappear. The ParkView
camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear
license plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the last selected touchscreen
appears again.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature
and it is turned on, the rear camera image will be displayed
for up to ten seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE unless one of the following conditions occurs:
• The vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h).
• The gear selector is moved to PARK.
• The soft button “Image defeat [X]” to disable the image
is pressed.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position. A
dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the
vehicle to assist with parking.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
tions, or blind spots before backing up. You are re-
sponsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located on the passenger side of the vehicle.
If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
cap is the correct one for this vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. It may
cause the MIL to turn on and could cause a fire.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys-
tem could result from using an improper fuel filler
cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the
fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap
can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to
illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping from the
system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
Fuel Filler Cap
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 187
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one
click. This is an indication that the cap is properly
tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the
vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose,
improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a
malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will display in the
odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙
sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is
properly tightened. Push the odometer reset button to turn
the message off. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might
indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in
a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the
problem will turn the MIL off.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
cle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must
be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The
weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be
determined separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the
vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear
axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to
rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified
weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down
low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose
control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Manual Transmission Automatic Transmission
Flat Tow NONE Transmission in NEUTRAL
65 mph (105 km/h) max
speed
NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
NOTE: When towing your vehicle, always follow appli-
cable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provin-
cial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer
provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
This vehicle may also be towed using a tow dolly (with the
front wheels OFF the ground).
Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may be flat
towed (with all four wheels on the ground) speeds up to
65 mph (105 km/h), for any distance, if the manual
transmission is in NEUTRAL.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an
automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain
will result. If these vehicles require towing, make
sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
DRIVING TIPS
Driving On Slippery Surfaces
Information in this section will aid in safe controlled
launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to
the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a
difference in the surface traction under the front (driving)
wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and care-
fully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be
observed:
• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
• Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first be-
come visible.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
Driving Through Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and pre-
vent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is
flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing
water can wear away the road or path’s surface and
cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Further-
more, flowing and/or rising water can carry your ve-
hicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shal-
low standing water, consider the following Cautions and
Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping dis-
tances. Therefore, after driving through standing
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in inju-
ries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing
water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path that
is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always in-
spect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmis-
sion, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid
that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this
may result in further damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause
it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ............197
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ....................197
▫ Replacement Bulbs .....................197
▫ Replacing Exterior Bulbs ..................198
▫ Replacing Interior Bulbs ..................200
䡵 FUSES ................................200
▫ Interior Fuses..........................201
▫ Underhood Fuses .......................203
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ..........205
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage...................205
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . . .206
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions ..........206
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit .........208
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ..........213
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage...................213
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . . .213
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions ..........214
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit .........216
䡵 JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE .............220
▫ Preparations For Jump Start ...............221
▫ Jump Starting Procedure ..................222
䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ..............223
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .............224
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............225
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ............226
▫ Automatic Transmission ..................227
7
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flashers. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the
switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
flashers.
Do not use this emergency warning system when the
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate with the
ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Overhead Lamp C5W
Courtesy Lamp W5W
Rear Cargo Lamp W5W
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 197
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Front Low and High Beam Headlamp HIR2LL
Front Parking/Daytime Running Lamps W21/5W
Front Fog Lamps H11LL
Front Side Marker Lamps W3W
Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W
Side Direction Lamps WY5W
Rear Turn Signal Lamps PY21W
Rear Side Marker Lamps W3W
Rear Tail and Stop Lamps P21/5W
Rear Backup Lamps W16W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp W5W
License Plate Lamps LED (See Authorized Dealer)
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit an authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps Low Beam And High Beam
1. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the headlamp
housing.
2. Rotate the bulb counter-clockwise.
3. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
4. Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in place.
5. Reinstall the plastic cap.
198 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime Running
Lamps
1. Turn the steering wheel completely to the left or right.
2. Open the wheel housing access door.
3. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the lamp
housing.
4. Rotate bulb/socket counter-clockwise.
5. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
6. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket
clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
7. Reinstall the plastic cap.
Front Fog Lamps
To replace the front fog lights, see an authorized dealer.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps
1. Remove portion of the wheel liner to allow hand access
to side marker lamp.
2. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise, and remove
the bulb and socket assembly from the housing.
3. Pull the bulb from the socket and insert the replacement
bulb.
4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing,
and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place.
5. Reinstall the wheel liner.
Wheel Housing Access Door
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 199
Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two screws and remove the tail lamp
assembly.
3. Remove four screws and separate the backplate from the
lamp housing.
4. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by pushing
them slightly and turning counter-clockwise.
5. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out.
6. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp.
Replacing Interior Bulbs
Rear Cargo Lamp
1. Using a suitable tool open the light box.
2. Pull the bulb out.
3. Replace the bulb, and reinstall the light box cover.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice
versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
(Continued)
Tail Lamp Assembly Screws
200 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control Module
(BCM) and is located on the driver’s side under the
instrument panel.
Cavity
Vehicle Fuse
Number
Mini Fuse Description
1 F12 7.5 Amp Brown Right Low Beam
2 F32 5 Amp Tan Front and Rear Ceiling Lights Trunk and
Door Courtesy Lights
3 F53 5 Amp Tan Instrument Panel Node
4 F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Door Locking
Fuse Panel
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 201
Cavity
Vehicle Fuse
Number
Mini Fuse Description
5 F36 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Socket, Vehicle Radio, Climate
Control System
6 F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-Directional Washer
7 F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Window
8 F13 7.5 Amp Brown Left Low Beam, Headlamp Leveling
9 F50 7.5 Amp Brown Airbag
10 F51 5 Amp Tan Vehicle Radio Switch, Climate Control Sys-
tem, Stop Light, Clutch
11 F37 5 Amp Tan Stop Light Switch, Instrument Panel Node
12 F49 5 Amp Tan Exterior Mirror, GPS, Electric Mirror, Parking
Sensor
13 F31 5 Amp Tan Ignition, Climate Control
14 F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Window
202 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Underhood Fuses
The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side of
the engine compartment, next to the battery. To access the
fuses, press the release tabs and remove the cover.
The ID number of the electrical component corresponding
to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover.
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F01 60 Amp Blue – Body Controller
F02 20 Amp Yellow – Audio Amplifier
F03 20 Amp Yellow – Ignition Switch
F04 40 Amp Orange – Anti-Lock Brake Pump
F05 70 Amp Tan – Electric Power Steering
Front Distribution Unit
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 203
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F06 20 Amp Yellow – Radiator Fan - Single Speed
F06 30 Amp Green – Radiator Fan - Low Speed
F07 40 Amp Orange – Radiator Fan - High Speed
F08 40 Amp Orange – Blower Motor
F09 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain
F10 – 10 Amp Red Horn
F11 – 15 Amp Blue Powertrain
F11 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped)
F14 – 5 Amp Tan High Beam (Shutter)
F15 – 15 Amp Blue Cigar Lighter
F16 – 7.5 Amp Brown Transmission
F17 – 25 Amp Clear Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped)
F17 – 15 Amp Blue Powertrain
F18 – 15 Amp Blue Powertrain
F18 – 5 Amp Tan Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped)
F19 – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioning
F20 – 15 Amp Blue Heated Seats – If Equipped
F21 – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump
F22 – 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain
F23 – 20 Amp Yellow Anti-Lock Brake Valves
204 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F24 – 7.5 Amp Brown Stability Control System
F30 – 15 Amp Blue Fog Lamps
F82 30 Amp Green – Sunroof/Convertible Top
F83 20 Amp Yellow – Cooling Pump – If Equipped
F84 – 10 Amp Red Transmission
F85 30 Amp Green – Rear Defroster
F87 – 5 Amp Tan Rear Defroster
F90 – 5 Amp Tan Heated Mirrors – If Equipped
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can
be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service
Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approxi-
mately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located under the front driver’s seat.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 205
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position for air pump operation only. Use the Black
Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to
inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6) when
selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to turn
on the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power
Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at the
lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure
optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing A
Tire With Tire Service Kit” section (F) “Sealant Bottle
And Hose Replacement”.
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Sealant Bottle 5 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Deflation Button 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 — Pressure Gauge 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
4 — Power Button 8 — Power Plug (located on the
bottom side of the Tire Service
Kit)
206 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one tire
application use and need to be replaced after each use.
Always replace these components immediately at your
original equipment vehicle dealer.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on
the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or
similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump
Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in
the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid inject-
ing sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only
intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm)
diameter in the tread of your tire.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service
Kit.
(Continued)
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 207
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under
the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the
wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat
source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty
of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physi-
cian immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do
not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immedi-
ately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
208 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on
the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the
kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or in
Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition in the
OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Sealant
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the
fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the valve
stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the park-
ing brake engaged and the gear selector in NEUTRAL.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 209
Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position and not
Air Mode. Push the Power Button (4) to turn On the Tire
Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt power
outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available.
Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the
Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and the
pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air Pump
Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant
Hose (6):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer
flowing through the hose (typically takes 30 - 70 sec-
onds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6),
the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8
Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from
approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure
when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button (2) to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument
panel.
210 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Ve-
hicle.”
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting
your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can
also result in sealant contacting internal Tire Service
Kit components which may cause permanent damage
to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or ten minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have
the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until
the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
To Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and screw
the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 211
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the
vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the
vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to “(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement”.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant Bottle
(1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose of it
accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so that
the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in the front
of the housing. Push the bottle into the housing. An
audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked
into place.
212 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its storage
area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread can
be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service
Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approxi-
mately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located under the front driver’s seat.
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Power Button 4 — Sealant Bottle 7 — Power Plug
2 — Mode Select
Knob
5 — Air Pump Hose
(Black)
8 — Pressure Gauge
3 — Sealant Hose
(Clear)
6 — Sealant Bottle
Release Button
9 — Deflation Button
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 213
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (2) and turn to this
position for air pump operation only. Use the
Black Air Pump Hose (5) when selecting this
mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (2) and turn to this
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and
to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear
hose) (3) when selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (1) once to
turn on the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the
Power Button (1) again to turn Off the Tire
Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (9) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (4) and Sealant
Hose (3) prior to the expiration date (printed at the
upper right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure
optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing A
Tire With Tire Service Kit” section (F) “Sealant Bottle
And Hose Replacement”.
Tire Service Kit Sealant Expiration Date Location
214 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
• The Sealant Bottle (4) and Sealant Hose (3) are a one tire
application use and need to be replaced after each use.
Always replace these components immediately at your
original equipment vehicle dealer.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on
the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or
similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump
Hose (5) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (2) is in
the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid inject-
ing sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only
intended to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm)
diameter in the tread of your tire.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service
Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under
the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the
wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat
source.
(Continued)
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 215
WARNING! (Continued)
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty
of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physi-
cian immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do
not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immedi-
ately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (3) and (5) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on
the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the
kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or in
Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition in the
OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (2) and turn to the Sealant
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (3) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
216 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the
fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (3) onto the valve
stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (7) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the park-
ing brake engaged and the gear selector in NEUTRAL.
• After pushing the Power Button (1), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (4) through the
Sealant Hose (3) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (3):
1. Push the Power Button (1) to turn Off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (3) from the valve stem.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
Sealant Hose (3) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode
Select Knob (2) is in the Sealant Mode position and not
Air Mode. Push the Power Button (1) to turn On the Tire
Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (7) to a different 12 Volt power
outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if available.
Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the
Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (4) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (2) is on Air Mode and the
pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air Pump
Hose (5) only, not the Sealant Hose (3).
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 217
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the Sealant
Hose (3):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer
flowing through the hose (typically takes 30 - 70 sec-
onds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (3),
the Pressure Gauge (8) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8
Bar). The Pressure Gauge (8) will decrease quickly from
approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure
when the Sealant Bottle (4) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
ately after the Sealant Bottle (4) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (8).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (1) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (4) and place the sticker on the instrument
panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (3) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Ve-
hicle.”
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting
your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can
also result in sealant contacting internal Tire Service
Kit components which may cause permanent damage
to the kit.
218 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or ten minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have
the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until
the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “(A) Whenever You
Stop To Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (2) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (5) (black in color) and screw
the fitting at the end of hose onto the valve stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (8).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the
vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (1) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended
inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from
12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in the
vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 219
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (4) and Sealant Hose (3)
assembly at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to “(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement”.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (3) (clear in color).
2. Locate the red colored round Sealant Bottle release
button at the lower right hand corner of the kit.
3. Push and hold the Sealant Bottle release button, then
pull out the bottle holding the button.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (4) in the housing so that
the Sealant Hose (3) aligns with the hose slot in the front
of the housing. Push and hold the Sealant Bottle release
button, then push the bottle into the housing by holding
the button. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place. Release the button.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of
the Sealant Hose (3) and return the hose to its storage
area (located on top of the housing).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump
starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
220 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than 12
Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator
or electrical system may occur.
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of the
engine compartment.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into
gear and turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the positive (+) bat-
tery post. To remove the cover pull upward on the cover.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
Positive Post Location
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 221
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the engine
ground (-) of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
222 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable from
the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from
the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle,
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following
procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Remove the gear selector override access cover (located
on the right side of the gear selector housing) by prying
at the bottom edge of the cover.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool into the access
hole, and push and hold the override release lever in.
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
Gear Selector Override Access Hole
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 223
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector override access cover.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the
instrument cluster will sound a chime. When safe, pull
over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle. Turn
off the air conditioning and wait until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the H (red) mark for more than a minute,
turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
224 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or SECOND
GEAR and REVERSE (with manual transmission), while
gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of
accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking
motion, without spinning the wheels, or racing the engine.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before
rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in
“Safety” for further information. Once the vehicle has been
freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙
mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rocking-
motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE/SECOND GEAR and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drive-
train damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 225
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Automatic Transmission Manual Transmission
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED If transmission is
operable:
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
• 65 mph (104 km/h)
max speed
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Front OK OK
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is man-
datory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode.
226 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam-
age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
Automatic Transmission
• Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated.
• Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off
the ground).
If the ignition key is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK in
order to move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an
automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain
will result. If these vehicles require towing, make
sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Manual Transmission
• Vehicle can be flat towed (all four wheels on the ground)
with the transmission in NEUTRAL.
• Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated.
• Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off
the ground).
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe engine and/or transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 227
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Enhanced Accident Re-
sponse System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed under certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
228 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SCHEDULED SERVICING .................231
▫ Maintenance Plan.......................232
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO .....235
▫ Checking Oil Level .....................236
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ...................236
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery .................237
䡵 DEALER SERVICE .......................238
▫ Engine Oil ...........................238
▫ Engine Oil Filter .......................239
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter .................240
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ..............240
▫ Body Lubrication ......................244
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades .................244
▫ Exhaust System ........................246
▫ Cooling System ........................248
▫ Brake System .........................252
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped ........253
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ......254
䡵 RAISING THE VEHICLE ..................255
䡵 TIRES ................................255
▫ Tire Safety Information ..................255
▫ Tires — General Information ..............262
▫ Tire Types ............................268
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ................270
▫ Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ..............272
▫ Tire Chains (Traction Devices) .............273
▫ Tir
e Rotation Recommendations ............274
8
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ..................274
▫ Treadwear ............................275
▫ Traction Grades ........................275
▫ Temperature Grades .....................275
䡵 BODYWORK ...........................276
▫ Protection From Atmospheric Agents ........276
▫ Body And Underbody Maintenance ..........276
▫ Preserving The Bodywork .................277
䡵 INTERIORS ............................279
▫ Seats And Fabric Parts ...................279
▫ Plastic And Coated Parts..................280
▫ Leather Parts ..........................280
▫ Glass Surfaces .........................281
230 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service
is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as
frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence
when the “Change Oil” message is displayed. Severe
operating conditions can cause the change oil message to
illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the
next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 231
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake
master cylinder as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Plan on the following pages for
required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system
turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as re-
quired.
Inspect brake pads, rotors, and park brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road
conditions.
232 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals,
and replace if necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect brake linings, replace if needed. X X X X X X X
Inspect parking brake function, adjust as necessary. X X X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
Clean and lube sun roof tracks. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace the spark plugs. ** X X X X X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.
XX
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 233
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
Replace accessory drive belt and tensioner. X
Replace the timing belt. X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
234 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap 6 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
5 — Battery
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 235
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are three possible dipstick types,
• Crosshatched zone.
• Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
• Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of
the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
• Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN and
the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE: Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the reading is at the
low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the
high end of the range marking.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment, and the fluid level should be checked
at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent (not engine coolant/ antifreeze). Refer to
“Engine Compartment” in this section for further informa-
tion.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
236 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainte-
nance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump Starting
Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 237
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera-
tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your ve-
hicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Engine Oil
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection for turbo-
charged engines under all types of operating conditions,
the manufacturer recommends synthetic engine oils that
are API Certified and meet the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS-12991.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Pe-
troleum Institute (API). The manu-
facturer only recommends API Cer-
tified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20,
0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine
oils.
238 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 1.4L Turbo
Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-40 synthetic engine oil is recommended for
all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low
temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your en-
gine oil filler cap also states the recommended engine oil
viscosity grade for your engine.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service station
or governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 239
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters
and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the ve-
hicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants ap-
proved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flam-
mable and can explode, injuring you. Other unap-
proved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the sys-
tem to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located in your owner’s
information kit, for further warranty information.
(Continued)
240 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant un-
der high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condition-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is an ozone-saving product. However,
the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning ser-
vice be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with
a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer recom-
mends that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the
blower operating, the blower can contact hands and
may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet on the
lower right of center console. Perform the following pro-
cedure to replace the filter:
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 241
1. Remove the Torx screw that secures the passenger side
console closeout cover.
2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward to disengage
the front retaining tab and remove the cover.
Torx Screw Location Console Closeout Panel
242 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Remove the two 5.5 mm screws (1 and 2) that secure the
particulate air filter cover to the HVAC housing.
4. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing. Take note of the air filter position indica-
tors.
5. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to
properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
6. Install the passenger side console closeout.
Air Filter Cover Screw Locations
A/C Air Filter
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 243
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the applica-
tion of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
proper function. When performing other underhood ser-
vices, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a
dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
244 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the follow-
ing points:
• Wear or uneven edges
• Foreign material
• Hardening or cracking
• Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
liftgate glass.
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully upward
unless the pivot cap is raised first.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade
off of the liftgate glass.
Lifting The Pivot Cap
1—WiperArm
2 — Pivot Cap
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 245
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it forward
to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade
holder.
4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press the
wiper blade until it snaps into place.
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust
system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further information.
(Continued)
Removing The Wiper Blade
1 — Wiper Blade 3 — Wiper Arm
2 — Blade Pivot Pin 4 — Wiper Blade Holder
246 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in
gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 247
Cooling System
WARNING!
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the
OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where appli-
cable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and
refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the
front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
248 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for further information.
NOTE:
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not
be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally
compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibi-
tors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propyl-
ene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of
propylene glycolbased engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 249
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for
assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (anti-
freeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as pos-
sible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank if so equipped.
250 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regu-
lated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children,
do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open contain-
ers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If
ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is adequate.
With the engine off and cold, the level of the coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the “MAX” and
“MIN” lines marked on the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain
the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle.
Do not overfill.
See an authorized dealer for service.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 251
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion pro-
tection of your engine which contains aluminum com-
ponents.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi-
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when
performing under hood services or immediately if the
“Brake Warning Light” is illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid
level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid
reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to
fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be
checked when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
252 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information. Using the
wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your
brake system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also
identified on the original factory installed hydraulic
master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylin-
der reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged brak-
ing, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
Please see an authorized dealer for service.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) below the bottom
of the hole.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 253
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Please see an authorized dealer for service.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri-
cant has become contaminated with water.
NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
changed immediately.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom-
mended fluid.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Techni-
cal Specifications” for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives
to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the
use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using
transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
254 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required; therefore the transmis-
sion has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you
notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit an
authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission
fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an im-
proper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contami-
nated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disas-
sembled for any reason.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to
an authorized dealer or service station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 255
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emer-
gency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
256 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
–
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards
and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
–
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
–
01 means the year 2001
–
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the
tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 257
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located be-
hind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. In-
flation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressures.
258 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 259
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operat-
ing” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
260 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-
340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 261
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the rec-
ommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never over-
load them.
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
262 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 263
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tem-
perature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-
tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
264 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immedi-
ately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 265
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more informa-
tion.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be re-
placed.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
266 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled
maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
NOTE: Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 267
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
may change suspension dimensions and perfor-
mance characteristics, resulting in changes to steer-
ing, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can
cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering
and suspension components. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad-
equate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
268 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi-
tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when am-
bient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit stud-
ded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
using these tire types.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 269
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
270 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collaps-
ible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the
electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 271
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equip-
ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces are not hot to
the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
272 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent dam-
age to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equiva-
lent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
the water droplets from the brake components. This activ-
ity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY US-
ING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices are
not recommended.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 273
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres-
sive tread designs such as those on all season type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Scheduled Servicing” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear
should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does
not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manu-
facturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the
tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Tire Rotation
274 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement, as measured under controlled condi-
tions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of
the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance, which all pas-
senger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 275
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road
surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or
cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protec-
tion.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resis-
tance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
276 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that
may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the
owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 277
Convertible Top Care — If Equipped
NOTE: Lubricate the top rails with Berulub FR 43 every
2000 cycles or if scratching noises due to dust are present.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior
water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:
• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage
the top material. Also, increased water pressure may
force past the weather strips.
• Remove any standing water from the top and dry the
surface before opening it. Operating the top, opening
a door or lowering a window while the top is wet
may allow water to drip into the vehicles interior.
• Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure
directed at the weather strip seals may cause water to
leak into the vehicles interior.
Immediate removal of any contaminant is recommended.
Regular washing of the top will enhance its life and
appearance, and make successive cleanings easier. Do not
subject the top to excessive heat. Frequently vacuum the
top and storage compartment.
Washing
Hand washing is highly recommended. Automatic car
washing equipment can damage the top material. If you
must use an automatic car wash, soft cloth systems are
preferred.
CAUTION!
Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage
the top material. Also, increased water pressure may
force water past the weather strips.
General Cleaning
Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful in
removing dust and other foreign particles. Wash in partial
shade instead of direct sun. Wet the entire vehicle before
washing the top. The top should be washed with a soft,
natural bristle scrub brush, and a mild soap solution such
as liquid dishwashing soap. Do not use detergent.
278 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches. Clean-
ers should not contain silicones, organic solvents,
petroleum distillates, or plasticizers. Always wait until
the top is thoroughly dry before lowering it into the
storage area.
Scrub in all directions, covering an area of about two
square feet at a time. Avoid heavy scrubbing. Rinse the
entire vehicle with water to remove all soap and dirt from
the top fabric and to prevent streaking on painted and
chrome surfaces. Allow the top to dry before lowering.
Vacuuming the top with a wet/dry shop vacuum will
decrease the top’s drying time, ensure removal of all dirt,
and delete streaks in the material. Multiple cleanings may
be necessary to remove stubborn stains. If stains persist,
contact your local authorized dealer for further sugges-
tions.
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents
or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun
damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 279
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather
upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
280 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE: If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer
more so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and FCA recommends Mopar total care leather
cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery, as
damage to the upholstery may result.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 281
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ........284
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM ........................284
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .285
▫ Torque Specifications ....................285
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...................286
▫ 1.4L Engine ..........................286
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ..................287
▫ Materials Added To Fuel .................287
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ...............287
▫ Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . .288
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ......288
▫ MMT In Gasoline .......................288
▫ Fuel System Cautions ....................288
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ...............289
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ......................290
䡵 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................290
▫ Engine ..............................290
▫ Chassis .............................292
9
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears engraved on the
right front door sill, under the sill scuff plate, on an
adhesive label applied to the right door opening on the
B-Pillar, on the vehicle registration and title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake sys-
tems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function. How-
ever, there will be some loss of overall braking effective-
ness. You may notice increased pedal travel during appli-
cation, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and
potential activation of the Brake Warning Light.
Vehicle Identification Number
Stamped VIN Location
284 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-
brated torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
66 Ft-Lbs (90 N·m)
Steel Wheels Only
74 Ft-Lbs (100 N·m)
Aluminum Wheels
Only
M12 x 1.25 17 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 285
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
1.4L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sion regulations, provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded “Regular”
gasoline having a posted octane number
of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2
method. For optimum performance and
fuel economy the use of “Premium” 91 octane gasoline or
higher is recommended.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
Torque Patterns
286 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifi-
cally blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of detergents
to further aide in minimizing engine
and fuel system deposits. When avail-
able, the usage of TOP TIER Detergent
gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and dia-
phragm materials.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen-
ates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15%
ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 287
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed
Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gaso-
line blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump;
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)
288 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CAUTION! (Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of metha-
nol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
additives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mon-
oxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 289
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 10.5 Gallons 40 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
1.4 Liter Turbo Engine 4 Quarts 3.8 Liters
Cooling System
1.4 Liter Turbo Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula) — with Manual Transmission
4.6 Quarts 4.4 Liters
1.4 Liter Turbo Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula) — with Automatic Transmission
5.8 Quarts 5.5 Liters
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the re-
quirements of FCA Material Standard MS-90032.
Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil,
meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12991. Refer to your
engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
290 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection 91 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine dam-
age and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ-
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (anti-
freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 291
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend you use Mopar C635 DDCT/MTX Trans-
mission Fluid.
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped Use only Mopar AW-1 Automatic Transmission Fluid or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the
function or performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3, SAE J1703 should
be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available,
then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Convertible Top Rails – If Equipped We recommend you use Berulub FR 43.
292 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MULTIMEDIA
CONTENTS
䡵 UCONNECT SYSTEMS ...................294
䡵 CYBERSECURITY .......................294
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS ...................295
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 3/3 NAV Display Settings..........296
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS .......305
▫ Radio Operation........................305
▫ Media Mode ..........................305
䡵 IPOD/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED ............................306
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .306
▫ General Information ....................306
䡵 UCONNECT 3/3 NAV VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS ...........................307
▫ Introducing Uconnect ....................307
▫ Get Started ...........................307
▫ Basic Voice Commands ...................308
▫ Radio ...............................309
▫ Media ...............................309
▫ Phone ...............................310
▫ General Information .....................311
▫ Additional Information ...................311
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ............311
10
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect system,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE: Uconnect screen images are for illustration pur-
poses only and may not reflect exact software for your
vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa-
tion. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a com-
puter or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behav-
ior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
294 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly
regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/support/
software-update.html (U.S. Residents) or www.driveu-
connect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn about avail-
able Uconnect software updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept infor-
mation and private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the
touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the
center of the instrument panel that allows you to access
and change the customer programmable features. Many
features can vary by vehicle.
Uconnect 3/3 NAV Display Buttons On The Touchscreen
And Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
10
MULTIMEDIA 295
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 3/3
NAV Display Settings
Push the Settings
button on the faceplate, to display
the settings menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect
system allows you to access programmable feature
settings.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting and make
your selection. Once the setting is complete, either press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen or push the back
button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu. Or
press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the up or down arrow buttons on
the right side of the screen allows you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition in
the “AVV/MAR” position.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
NOTE:
When the “Display Mode” feature is set to “Auto” the radio touchscreen’s brightness is adjusted with all other instru-
ment panel displays and lights when they are adjusted using the instrument cluster display buttons on the right-hand
side of the instrument cluster display. When the “Display Mode” feature is set to “Manual” the radio screen bright-
ness can be adjusted independently using the “Brightness” feature below:
Brightness +–
Language English Español Français
Touchscreen Beep On Off
296 MULTIMEDIA
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the instrument cluster display. The following selectable
units of measure are listed below:
Setting Name Selectable Options
US Changes the instrument cluster display to US units of
measure.
Metric Changes the instrument cluster display to Metric units of
measure.
After pressing “Custom” on the touchscreen, you may
select from one of the below menu items:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Fuel Consumption MPG (US) L/100 km
MPG (UK) km/L
Temperature °C °F
Pressure psi kPa
10
MULTIMEDIA 297
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Long
Show Command List Always With Help Never
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Time and Format 12 hour 24 hour
NOTE: Press the corresponding arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then select “AM” or “PM.”
Show Time Status On Off
Set Date Set Date
NOTE: Press the corresponding arrows above and below the current date to adjust.
Sync Time — If Equipped On Off
NOTE: When in the “Sync Time” display, you may sync the time with GPS.
298 MULTIMEDIA
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Hill Start Assist — If Equipped On Off
Rear View Camera Delay On Off
ParkView Backup Camera Active
Guide Lines — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE: When this feature is enabled, active (dynamic) grid lines are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to
illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected back up path based on the steering wheel position. A dashed cen-
ter line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed
Guide Lines — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE: When this feature is enabled, fixed (static) grid lines are overlaid on the Rear Backup Camera image to illus-
trate the width of the vehicle.
10
MULTIMEDIA 299
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Daytime Running Lights On Off
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE: When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a
speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
Remote Door Unlock/Door Unlock Driver All
NOTE: When “Driver” is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button,
you must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When “All” is selected, all of the
doors will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button.
300 MULTIMEDIA
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Radio Off Delay 0 min. 20 min.
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Equalizer +–
NOTE:
•
When in the “Equalizer” display, you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings.
•
Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly
on the desired setting.
Balance/Fade When in the “Balance/ Fade” display, you may adjust the Balance settings.
Auto-On Radio On Off Recall Last
NOTE:
When the “Auto-On Radio” feature is selected, the radio automatically turns on when the vehicle is in RUN or recalls
whether it was on or off at last ignition off.
10
MULTIMEDIA 301
Setting Name Selectable Options
Radio Off With Door On Off
NOTE:
When the “Radio Off With Door” feature is selected, the radio remains on until the driver or passenger door is
opened or when the Radio Off Delay time expires.
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Phones List of Paired Phones
NOTE: The “Paired Phones” feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further in-
formation, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
302 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
NOTE: “Tune Start” begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one
of the 12 presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during
that current song. “Tune Start” works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that you will
miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip Channel Skip
NOTE: SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning.
Subscription Information Subscription Info
NOTE:
•
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with
your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Sub-
scription Information screen to re-subscribe.
•
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
10
MULTIMEDIA 303
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings Yes No
NOTE: When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to
their default settings. To restore the settings to their default setting, press the Restore Settings button. A pop-up will
appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?” Once the settings are restored, a pop up ap-
pears stating ⬙settings reset to default⬙.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data Yes No
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it will remove personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data” button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you
want to clear all personal data?” Once the data has been cleared, a pop up appears stating ⬙Personal data cleared”.
304 MULTIMEDIA
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch increases the volume, and pushing the bottom of the
rocker switch decreases the volume.
Pushing the center button makes the radio switch between
the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/AUX/Media
Player, etc.) and can also be used to select/enter an item
while scrolling through menu.
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-
button in the center. The function of the left-hand control is
different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
“Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next track on
the selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth). Pushing the
bottom of the switch once goes to the beginning of the
Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
10
MULTIMEDIA 305
current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it
is within eight seconds after the current track begins to
play.
IPOD/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF
EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB or AUX port, located on the center
console.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the an-
tenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference, and
• This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
USB/AUX Port
1 — Auxiliary Cable Jack
2 — USB Connector
306 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT 3/3 NAV VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your Uconnect system.
Get Started
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instruc-
tions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conver-
sations are examples of noise that may impact recogni-
tion.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the
rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or PHONE button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or PHONE button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect 3/3 NAV
10
MULTIMEDIA 307
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• “ Cancel” to stop a current voice session
• “ Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• “ Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
VR And Phone Buttons
1 — Push To MUTE
2 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive
A Text
3 — Push To End Call
4 — Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions
Uconnect 3/3 NAV VR
308 MULTIMEDIA
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• “ Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
• “ Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want
to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say
“ Help.” The system provides you with a list of com-
mands.
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and Aux-
iliary ports (if equipped). Voice operation is only available
for connected USB and iPod devices.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
• “ Change source to Bluetooth”
• “ Change source to iPod”
• “ Change source to USB”
Uconnect 3/3 NAV Radio
10
MULTIMEDIA 309
• “ Play artist Beethoven”; “ Play album Greatest Hits”; “
Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “ Play genre Classical”
TIP: Press the “Browse” button on the touchscreen to see
all of the music on your iPod or USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song
and genre information is displayed.
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated for
the Uconnect 3/3 NAV radio, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone
(if active) or VR button . After the
beep, say one of the following commands:
• “ Call John Smith”
• “ Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts”
• “ Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)”
• “ Call back (call previous incoming phone number)”
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
(if active) or VR button and say “ Call,” then
pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone
book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you
can say “ Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 3/3 NAV Media
310 MULTIMEDIA
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Additional Information
© 2018 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
For Uconnect system support, call 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours
a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com (U.S.
Residents) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
• Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
• If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
• Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching
the disc.
Uconnect 3/3 NAV Phone
10
MULTIMEDIA 311
• Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
• Store the disc in its case after playing.
• Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
• Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc), oversized, or
have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service.
312 MULTIMEDIA
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ........................314
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ..............314
▫ Prepare A List .........................314
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ..............314
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................314
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center .............315
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........315
▫ In Mexico Contact ......................315
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands..........315
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) ....................315
▫ Service Contract .......................316
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION ...............317
䡵 MOPARPARTS .........................317
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS .............317
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .317
▫ In Canada ............................317
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .............318
11
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work
to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
314 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (888) 242-6342
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (888) 242-6342
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunica-
tion Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 315
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manu-
facturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufac-
turer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufactur-
er’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-
521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service con-
tract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manu-
facturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those docu-
ments.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
316 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are avail-
able from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 317
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Master-
card, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and fea-
tures. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and driv-
ability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce-
dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com (U.S.)
318 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
12
About Your Brakes .........................284
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .............249
Adding Fuel ..............................187
Adding Washing Fluid .......................236
Additives, Fuel ............................287
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation ........................128
Air Bag Warning Light .....................125
Driver Knee Air Bag ......................129
Enhanced Accident Response .............134, 228
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................228
If Deployment Occurs .....................133
Knee Impact Bolsters ......................128
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .............137
Maintenance ............................137
Side Air Bags ...........................129
Transporting Pets ........................154
Air Bag Light .......................85, 125, 156
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)......240
Air Conditioner Maintenance ..................240
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ................240, 241
Air Conditioner System ......................240
Air Conditioning Filter ....................57, 241
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ................55
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ..................241
Air Filter ................................240
Air Pressure
Tires..................................264
Alarm
Security Alarm ...........................22
Alarm System
Security Alarm ...........................22
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ................5
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................249, 290
Capacities ..............................290
Disposal ...............................251
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................100
Anti-Lock Warning Light ...................89, 94
Arming System
Security Alarm ...........................
22
Audio Systems (Radio).......................294
Automatic Dimming Mirror .................34, 35
Automatic Transmission ..................167, 254
Adding Fluid ...........................255
Autostick ..............................174
Fluid And Filter Change ...................255
Fluid Change ...........................255
Fluid Level Check ........................255
Fluid Type ..........................254, 292
Special Additives .........................254
320 INDEX
Autostick ................................174
Battery ...............................87, 237
Charging System Light .....................87
Jump Starting ...........................220
Belts, Seat ................................156
Body Mechanism Lubrication ..................244
B-Pillar Location ...........................259
Brake Assist System .........................101
Brake Fluid ...........................290, 292
Brake, Parking.............................164
Brake System ..........................252, 284
Anti-Lock (ABS) ......................100, 284
Fluid Check ............................252
Master Cylinder .........................252
Parking ...............................164
Warning Light ...........................86
Brake/Transmission Interlock ..................168
Bulb Replacement ..........................197
Bulbs, Light ...........................158, 197
Camera, Rear .............................185
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...........290
Capacities, Fluid ...........................290
Caps, Filler
Fuel ..................................187
Oil (Engine) ............................239
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) .................250
Carbon Monoxide Warning ................155, 289
Car Washes...............................277
Cellular Phone ............................306
Certification Label ..........................188
Chains, Tire ..............................273
Change Oil Indicator .........................83
Changing A Flat Tire ........................255
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) ....97
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............155
Checks, Safety.............................155
Child Restraint ............................139
Child
Restraints
Booster Seats ............................142
Child Seat Installation .....................151
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt ........149
Infant And Child Restraints .................141
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......144
Older Children And Child Restraints ...........141
Seating Positions .........................143
Clean Air Gasoline .........................287
12
INDEX 321
Cleaning
Wheels ................................272
Climate Control ............................44
Automatic ..............................54
Manual ................................45
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance................311
Compact Spare Tire .........................270
Contract, Service ...........................316
Convertible Top Maintenance ..................278
Coolant (Antifreeze).........................290
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............250
Cooling System ............................248
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .................249
Coolant Level ........................248, 251
Disposal Of Used Coolant ..................251
Drain, Flush, And Refill ....................248
Inspection ..............................251
Points To Remember ......................251
Pressure Cap ............................250
Radiator Cap ...........................250
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..........249, 290
Corrosion Protection ........................276
Cruise Control (Speed Control) .................177
Cruise Light ...............................95
Cupholders ...............................67
Customer Assistance ........................314
Customer Programmable Features...............295
Cybersecurity .............................294
Daytime Running Lights....................37, 38
Dealer Service .............................238
Defroster, Windshield........................156
Diagnostic System, Onboard....................96
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ...............................37
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ............................236
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .................251
Door Ajar ..............................87, 88
Door Ajar Light ..........................87, 88
Doors....................................
24
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ........................26
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water .................................192
Electrical Power Outlets.......................69
Electric Remote Mirrors .......................36
Electronic Brake Control System ................101
322 INDEX
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...............103
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ..........87
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................197
Jacking ................................255
Jump Starting ...........................220
Towing ................................226
Emission Control System Maintenance ............97
Engine
Air Cleaner .............................240
Break-In Recommendations .................163
Checking Oil Level .......................236
Compartment ...........................235
Cooling ...............................248
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................155, 289
Fails To Start ............................162
Flooded, Starting .........................162
Fuel Requirements ........................286
Oil ...............................238, 290
Oil Filler Cap ...........................239
Oil Filter ...............................239
Oil Selection .........................238, 290
Oil Synthetic ............................239
Overheating ............................224
Starting ...............................161
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .........134, 228
Ethanol..................................287
Exhaust Gas Cautions ....................155, 289
Exhaust System ........................155, 246
Exterior Lighting............................37
Exterior Lights.......................37, 158, 197
Filters
Air Cleaner .............................240
Air Conditioning ......................57, 241
Engine Oil .............................239
Engine Oil Disposal .......................239
Flashers
Turn Signals .......................37, 95, 158
Flash-To-Pass ..............................
37
Flooded Engine Starting ......................162
Fluid, Brake ..............................292
Fluid Capacities............................290
Fluid Leaks...............................158
Fluid Level Checks
Brake .................................252
Engine Oil .............................236
Fluids...................................290
Fluids And Lubricants .......................290
Fog Lights..............................37, 39
12
INDEX 323
Folding Rear Seat ...........................26
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ......................225
Fuel ....................................286
Adding ...............................187
Additives ..............................287
Capacity ...............................290
Clean Air ..............................287
Ethanol ...............................287
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ......................187
Gasoline ...............................286
Gauge .................................91
Materials Added .........................287
Methanol ..............................287
Octane Rating ...........................286
Requirements ...........................286
Specifications ...........................290
Tank Capacity ...........................290
Fueling..................................187
Fuses ...................................200
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) .................187, 188
Gasoline, Clean Air .........................287
Gasoline (Fuel) .........................286, 290
Gasoline, Reformulated ......................287
Gauges
Fuel ...................................91
Gear Ranges ..............................169
Gear Select Lever Override....................223
General Information .....................114,306
Glass Cleaning ............................281
GVWR ..................................188
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water .................................192
Headlights..............................37, 38
Cleaning ...............................276
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ...........37
Lights On Reminder .......................37
Passing ..............................37, 38
Switch ..............................37, 38
T
ime Delay ..............................37
Head Restraints ............................32
Heated Mirrors ..........................34, 37
Heated Seats...............................30
Hill Start Assist ............................102
Hood Prop ................................64
Hood Release ..............................64
324 INDEX
Ignition ..................................19
Switch .................................19
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ......................21
Instrument Cluster
Descriptions .............................95
Display ................................80
Instrument Cluster ........................74
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................280
Interior Appearance Care .....................279
Interior Lighting ............................40
Introduction ................................4
iPod/USB/MP3 Control......................306
Jack Operation ............................255
Jump Starting .............................220
Key Fob
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........18, 21
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ......18
Key-In Reminder............................21
Keys ....................................16
Replacement .............................22
Sentry (Immobilizer) .......................21
Lane Change And Turn Signals .................37
Lane Change Assist .......................37, 40
Lap/Shoulder Belts .........................117
Latches..................................158
Hood ..................................64
Lead Free Gasoline .........................286
Leaks, Fluid ..............................158
Life Of Tires ..............................267
Liftgate ..................................66
Liftgate (Sedan).............................66
Light Bulbs ...........................158, 197
Lights ................................38, 158
AirBag..........................85, 125, 156
Brake Assist Warning ......................106
Brake Warning ...........................86
Bulb Replacement ........................197
Cruise .................................95
Daytime Running .........................37
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...................37
Engine Temperature Warning .................88
Exterior ...............................158
Headlights ..............................37
High Beam ..............................38
High Beam/Low
Beam Select .................37
Instrument Cluster ........................37
Lights On Reminder .......................37
12
INDEX 325
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ...........91
Park ................................38, 95
Passing ..............................37, 38
Seat Belt Reminder ........................88
Security Alarm ...........................22
Service ................................197
Traction Control .........................106
Turn Signal ..............................40
Turn Signals .......................37, 95, 158
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) ........88
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions ........95
Loading Vehicle............................188
Tires..................................259
Locks
Power Door .............................26
Lubrication, Body ..........................244
Lug Nuts/Bolts ............................285
Maintenance Free Battery .....................237
Maintenance Schedule .......................231
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) ......91, 97
Manual, Service............................318
Manual Transmission ....................165, 253
Fluid Level Check ........................253
Frequency Of Fluid Change .................254
Lubricant Selection ....................253, 292
Methanol ................................287
Mirrors ..................................34
Automatic Dimming ....................34, 35
Electric Powered ..........................36
Heated ..............................34, 37
Outside ................................34
Rearview ...............................34
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ................5
Monitor, Tire Pressure System..................107
Mopar Parts ..............................317
MP3 Control ..............................306
Multi-Function Control Lever ................37, 38
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..................163
Occupant Restraints .........................114
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .................286
Oil Change
Indicator .........................83
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ....................83
Oil, Engine............................238, 290
Capacity ...............................290
Change Interval .........................238
Checking ..............................236
Dipstick ...............................236
326 INDEX
Disposal ...............................239
Filter .................................239
Filter Disposal ...........................239
Identification Logo .......................238
Materials Added To .......................239
Pressure Warning Light .....................88
Recommendation .....................238, 290
Synthetic ..............................239
Viscosity ...............................239
Oil Filter, Change ..........................239
Oil Filter, Selection..........................239
Oil Pressure Light ...........................88
Onboard Diagnostic System ....................96
Operating Precautions ........................96
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ...............5
Outside Rearview Mirrors .....................34
Overheating, Engine ........................224
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ...........5,318
Paint Care................................276
Parking Brake .............................164
Passing Light ..............................38
Pets ....................................154
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ...........259
Power
Brakes ................................284
Door Locks ..............................26
Mirrors ................................36
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .............69
Steering ...............................176
Sunroof ................................58
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ................122
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................122
Radial Ply Tires ............................265
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap).............250
Radio Frequency
General Information .....................19, 22
Radio Operation ...........................306
Rear Camera ..............................185
Rear Liftgate (Sedan) .........................66
Rear Seat, Folding ...........................2
6
Recreational Towing.........................190
Reformulated Gasoline.......................287
Refrigerant ...............................241
Release, Hood..............................64
Reminder, Lights On .........................37
Reminder, Seat Belt .........................116
12
INDEX 327
Remote Keyless Entry
Power Convertible Top Function ..............16
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........18, 21
Replacement Bulbs .........................197
Replacement Keys ...........................22
Replacement Tires ..........................267
Reporting Safety Defects .....................317
Restraint, Head.............................32
Restraints, Child ...........................139
Rotation, Tires.............................274
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...................156
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .................158
Safety Defects, Reporting .....................317
Safety, Exhaust Gas .........................155
Safety Information, Tire ......................255
Safety Tips ...............................155
Schedule, Maintenance.......................231
Seat Belt
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................119
Seat Belt Maintenance .......................279
Seat Belt Reminder ..........................88
Seat Belts .............................116,156
Child Restraints .........................139
Energy Management Feature ................122
Extender ...............................121
Front Seat .......................116,117,119
Inspection ..............................156
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................117
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............121
Operating Instructions .....................119
Pregnant Women .........................122
Pretensioners ...........................122
Rear Seat ..............................117
Reminder ..............................116
Seat Belt Extender ........................121
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................122
Untwisting Procedure .....................121
Seats ....................................26
Adjustment .............................26
Heated .................................30
Rear Folding .............................
26
Seatback Release ..........................26
Tilting .................................26
Security Alarm .............................22
Sentry Key
Key Programming .........................21
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ......................21
Service Assistance ..........................314
Service Contract ...........................316
328 INDEX
Service Manuals ...........................318
Settings
Personal ...............................295
Shift Lever Override ........................223
Shift Speeds, Manual Transmission ..............166
Shoulder Belts .............................117
Side View Mirror Adjustment...................34
Signals, Turn ......................37, 40, 95, 158
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ....................273
Snow Tires ...............................269
Spare Tires.........................270, 271, 272
Spark Plugs ..............................290
Speed Control
Cancel ................................180
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .................177
Sport Mode...............................175
Starting .................................161
Automatic Transmission ....................161
Button .................................19
Cold Weather ...........................161
Engine Fails To Start ......................162
Manual Transmission ......................161
Steering
Power ................................176
Tilt Column .............................34
Wheel, Heated ...........................34
Wheel, Tilt ..............................34
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .................305
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .305
Storage...................................67
Storage, Vehicle.............................56
Stuck, Freeing .............................225
Sun Roof .................................58
Synthetic Engine Oil ........................239
Telescoping Steering Column ...................34
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ............54
Tilt Steering Column .........................34
Time Delay
Headlight ...............................37
Tire And Loading Information Placard............259
Tire Markings .............................256
Tires..........................158, 262,
270, 274
Aging (Life Of Tires) ......................267
Air Pressure ............................262
Chains ................................273
Changing ..............................255
Compact Spare ..........................270
General Information ...................262, 270
High Speed .............................264
12
INDEX 329
Inflation Pressure ........................264
Jacking ................................255
Life Of Tires ............................267
Load Capacity .......................259, 260
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ............92
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) .............107
Quality Grading .........................274
Radial ................................265
Replacement ............................267
Rotation ...............................274
Safety .............................255, 262
Snow Tires .............................269
Spare Tires ......................270, 271, 272
Spinning ...............................266
Tread Wear Indicators .....................266
Wheel Nut Torque ........................285
Tire Safety Information.......................255
Tire Service
Kit......205, 206, 208, 211, 212, 213, 214, 216, 219, 220
To Open Hood .............................64
Towing ..................................190
Disabled Vehicle .........................226
Recreational ............................190
Towing Behind A Motorhome ..................190
Traction .................................191
Traction Control ...........................102
Trailer Towing.............................190
Transmission
Automatic ..........................167, 254
Manual ................................165
Transporting Pets ..........................154
Tread Wear Indicators .......................266
Turn Signals ..........................37, 40, 95
Uconnect
Uconnect Settings ........................295
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ..................274
Unleaded Gasoline .........................286
Untwisting Pr
ocedure, Seat Belt ................121
USB....................................306
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............284
Vehicle Loading ........................188, 260
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.................5
Vehicle Security Alarm........................22
Vehicle Storage .............................56
Voice Recognition System (VR) .................307
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions) ....90
Warnings And Cautions .......................5
330 INDEX
Warranty Information .......................317
Washer
Adding Fluid ...........................236
Washers, Windshield ......................41, 43
Washing Vehicle ...........................277
Water
Driving Through .........................192
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ...................272
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ...................272
Wind Buffeting ..........................58, 59
Window Fogging ...........................56
Windows .................................57
Windshield Defroster ........................156
Windshield Washers .......................41, 43
Windshield Wiper Blades .....................244
Windshield Wipers ..........................41
Wipers Blade Replacement ....................244
12
INDEX 331
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
WARNING:
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing
exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
OWNER’S MANUAL
2018
FIAT
®
500 ABARTH
AND ABARTH CABRIO
Third Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group
Marketing S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC.
18FX-126-AC
FIAT
®
500 ABARTH
2018
